Home

S84ex/S86ex Operator Manual

1. Adjustment for value l l No adjustment Adjustment for value N 3 75 mm 0 15 3 75 mm 0 15 Note The above dispensing position for printing indicates the label stop position when the media sensor is set to Gap sensor 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 249 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments Adjust the stop position using the following procedure 1 Make sure that the printer is in online mode or offline mode 2 Press the A and V buttons for one second to enter the adjustment mode PITCH POSITION PITCH POSITION shows on the screen 0 Oomi 3 Press the 2 ENTER button to go to the next adjustment screen OFFSET POSITION OFFSET POSITION shows on the screen 4 Change the setting value Press the A V a MA mm buttons to set the desired value Set the offset value with to move the stop position opposite the feed direction and value with to move the stop position in the feed direction The setting value is adjustable by 0 25 mm 0 01 regardless of print resolution The setting range is from 3 75 mm 0 15 to 3 75 mm 0 15 5 Press the 1 ENTER button to save the setting and proceed to the next adjustment screen 6 3 4 More about the Media Stop Position Stop position of the label in dispenser mode The regular position is to let the label stay about 1 mm 0 04 on the liner Stop position Fee
2. eessse 247 6 3 1 About the Base Reference Point ccccccccccsecceececeeeeeeeeseseeseeeseeeseeeseeesseeeaeeees 247 6 3 2 Adjusting the Print FOSITODLs saec vopaqs treten d pad eMe med ki elu red 2e vade vede tdeo oda 248 6 3 3 Adjusting the Media Stop Position cccccecccccecsseeeeeceeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeseueeeeessaees 249 6 3 4 More about the Media Stop Position eeeeeessseeseseeeeeernnennn 250 6 3 5 Limitation on Base Reference Point Adjustment eeeseseessesss 251 6 4 Adjusting the Print Quality ere isa sca aen arae in Vaux Ea Yi uas KR CHECA CER R P YO EV E IEEE 252 6 4 1 Adjustment of the Print Darkness cccccccceececseeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeenens 252 6 42 Adiusting he Prin Speca i eios dos ert a aie 253 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 3 Table of Contents 6 5 Adjusting the Media SeNSOFs ccsssseccsssseeseeseeeseesseeseeneeseesseesseaseeseneneees 255 6 5 1 Adjusting the Media Sensor Automatically cccccccccsseceeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeessaaees 255 6 5 2 Adjusting the I mark Sensor Level Manually ccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeaees 258 6 5 3 Adjusting the Gap Sensor Level Manually ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeessaaes 261 6 5 4 Adjusting the Paper End Sensor cccccseseccccenseeceseaeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeeseaeeeeeesaaee
3. Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the l lt 1 button INTERFACE MODE menu X button i l Shows only when DATA PORT is selected i 1 l i L L e c Nene cen e cp i eee Shows only when l i IGNORE CAN DLE PROTOCOL is setto 1 STATUS 4 1 l L L eee i ose arene res ew Bese oe oe eee ie a eel Xbuton t E 0 000 0 T Select ENABLE lt 4 Shows only when the SNTP FUNCTION button calendar IC is installed and a LAN ENABLE Benes fo E 1 connection is established X button Select DISABLE 44 button mon Select IPv6 Pv4 6 select 4 button EE dj l Select IPv4 t 4 button X button l l l l l l X button NTP IPv4 ADDRESS NTP IPv6 ADDRESS i 000 0000 0000 i 00 000 000 000 0000 0000 0000 1 TT 0000 0000 TT l l l l l l l l 4 button 4 button IPv4 l 1 r I 1 r l I r l l I l I I l l r l 1 r I l r l I r l l r l 1 I I l l r i X button IPv6 i I I l l I r l I r l i r l l r l 1 I I l r l 1 r l I I L l r l TIME ZONE X button 4 miy 00 ERROR NOTICE ENABLE MITZSRS 4 F 4 button S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen 1 1
4. X button COMMAND ERROR ENABLE DRESS 4 F 4 button 142 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the ADVANCED MODE menu A X button HEAD CHECK ENABLE DISABLE P X button BARCODE DISABLE 4 4 button X button HEAD CHECK MODE ENABLE 4 CHECK PAGE 4 button Shows only when HEAD l CHECK MODE is setto CHECK PAGE i l X button EXTERNAL SIGNAL Xbuton 4 03 Shows only when i DISABLE 1 EXTERNAL SIGNAL CONTINUOUS is EOE DISABLE SECURE 4 r 4 button l X button EXTERNAL SIGNAL TYPE1 TYPE2 TYPES EOZ 4 button EXTERNAL REPRINT ENABLE MELSNS 4 F 4 button X button CONTINUOUS PRINT ENABLE MELVNS 4 F 4 button X button ENHANCED REPRINT Shows only when EXTERNAL REPRINT is enabled ENABLE BIETEN i 4k l 4 button em T S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 143 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the ADVANCED MODE menu H X button 1 0 SIGNAL SETTING YES YES 4 X bu
5. l A button 3 7 3 Select CONTINUE 1 button MCS Setting Processing S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 167 4 Operation and Configuration RFID LIFE COUNT This screen shows the total accumulated number of RFID write from the factory clear RFID LIFE COUNT e SUCCESS shows the total number of write success SUCCESS 000000 FAILURE shows the total number of write failure FAILURE 000000 TOTAL shows the total number of write success and write failure TOTAL 000000 When the value of TOTAL exceeded 999999 all the values are cleared to 000000 RFID COUNT This screen shows the current RFID write numbers after the RFID counter is cleared RFID COUNT e SUCCESS shows the number of write success SUCCESS 000000 FAILURE shows the number of write failure FAILURE 000000 TOTAL shows the total number of write success and write failure TOTAL 000000 When the value of TOTAL exceeded 999999 all the values are cleared to 000000 CLEAR RFID COUNT Select whether or not to clear the current RFID counter YES Proceed to clear the RFID write numbers SUCCESS FAILURE CLEAR RFID COUNT and TOTAL NO Do not clear the RFID counter YES NO 4 F Note The total accumulated number of RFID write in the RFID LIFE COUNT is not cleared 168 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration RFID LABEL DATA Set the recovery operation at RFID tag error and recovery conditions at wh
6. MANUAL Set to the prefix determined by the MCS Prefix Digit and MCS Prefix Data MCS Prefix Digit Set the number of digits for the MCS prefix The setting range is from O to 3 digits Note Shows only if MANUAL is selected in the MCS Prefix screen MCS Prefix Data oet the MCS prefix data Number of digits to be input is according to the setting of the MCS Prefix Digit Note Shows only if MANUAL is selected in the MCS Prefix screen 4 Operation and Configuration Chip Manufacture MPINJ MCS Prefix NUI MANUAL 4 F MCS Prefix Digit DIGIT S a r When MCS Prefix Digit is set as 3DIGIT S the printer shows the screen as follow MCS Prefix Data S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 173 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 16 Information Mode The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the information mode The table describes each setting screen in detail INFORMATION MODE Agapi D GA x button Shows only when the l l PASSWORD input is enabled l l l S84 ex 203dpi Ver 61 XX XX XX X button SERIAL NO S N 00000000 sede pS SS eS SS Q1 iis X button 5 OWS aS LAN IP ADDRESS if an IP address is not acquired from the 128 212 L 5 DHCP setting l l l A 4 button l l l X button LAN IPv6 ADDRESS 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 J a l L i l L i l i i l i i l i i l
7. No Message LED Buzzer Cause _ Countermeasure Calendar error Lights red The date and time of the l Check if you have if you have ns calendar are incorrect or installed the calendar IC One long beep the calendar IC is not or replace the calendar installed PCB To clear the error Power off the printer Flashes red Could not read write to Discard this tag the RFID inlay Three short beeps To clear the error Auto recovery or cancel the job Press the RESUME PRINTING X CANCEL button WITH PRIN or send the CAN command The second screen will be switched by EXT signal setting Flashes red The number of failed Discard this tag RFID writes exceeded the Three short beeps specified MAX ERR COUNT To clear the error Press the Pll LINE or FEED button LINE TO CONTINUE Press the FEED TO CANCEL X CANCEL button or send the CAN command to cancel the job 2 6 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Error No Message LED Buzzer Cause Countermeasure Overheat error OVERHEAT ERROR PLEASE WAIT PLEASE WAIT DURING COOLING PLEASE CHECK SEND DATA EL CRC CHECK ERROR v MES PLEASE CHECK SEND DATA Wireless LAN error c BJ WLAN UNIT ERROR v P BJ PLEASE CONTACT SUPPORT CENTER l Flashes blue and red alternately One long beep To clear the error Stop the operation of the printer and wait until the temperature decreases Flashes red Three short be
8. The printer is writing the downloaded data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data writing progress XX XX shows the file number being written and total number of files After writing the data it goes to the VERIFYING screen A TE Lud Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to SD CARD or USB MEMORY VERIFYING XX XX DOWNLOAD The printer is verifying the downloaded data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data verification progress PH XX XX shows the file number being verified and total number of files After verifying the data it goes to the PROGRAM DOWNLOAD VERIFYING XX XX COMPLETED screen 5L E Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to SD CARD or USB MEMORY 188 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 20 Upload Mode The upload feature allows the operator to upload data firmware font logo TrueType font configuration status5 log from the printer and write it to an SD card or USB memory When uploading is complete the LCD screen will return to the original screen after three seconds If an error occurs an error message will show and the reason will be identified CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or S
9. 11 SHELL SHIELD SHELL 364 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Connector Pin Specifications I O Description 25 pins 14 pins 14 Frame Ground Vcc 5 V Output Machine Error Outputs a low signal when an error such as the head open error is detected Output Print end signal PREND Outputs a signal when the media print is completed Output Online Outputs a low signal when the printer is in offline mode 2 Label Near End nput Printer received a label near end signal when a low signal is detected Input Reprint signal PRIN2 Prints the previously printed content again when a low signal is detected OUT COM Ground of peripherals Vcc 45 V 12 13 14 15 16 13 12 24 V t 1096 GND Reference Signal Ground OUT COM Ground of peripherals Ribbon End Outputs a low signal when the ribbon end is detected 3 Output 1 1 Output Paper End Outputs a low signal when the paper end is detected Ribbon Near End Outputs a high signal when the ribbon near end is detected 18 10 Output 19 20 Input 2_ Print start signal PRIN Prints one media when a low signal is detected Label Feed Feeds one media when a low signal is detected 21 11 Input 22 13 Input IN COM Power supply from peripherals GND Reference Signal Ground NO NIN S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 365 8 Appendix Note You can set the external signal type TYPE1
10. Move the cursor using the A V buttons change the value using the lt P gt buttons and then press the 4 ENTER button to set the value The printable maximum size of the TrueType font varies depending on the setting as follows GB18030 KSX1001 Available TrueType font size MB YES YES YES Note When the printer tries to print a TrueType font that is bigger than the maximum size a command error occurs 140 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual HEAD SELECT Set the type of print head installed in the S86 ex printer select according to the first fourteen to fifteen characters of the print head serial number The selection varies depending on the print head density Note e Shows only for S86 ex series model with the firmware version later than 61 00 00 06 e If the installed print head and the selected type do not match the printing cannot be done correctly Make sure to set correctly for correct printing SAVE USER DEF This is a screen for saving service mode and advanced mode settings performed by the user as default settings YES Save the printer settings NO Do not save the printer settings Note The printer can be initialized to this setting at a later time Refer to Section 4 2 18 Default Setting Mode DEFAULT SETTING COMPLETED Shows when the printer settings have been saved completely Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 4 Operation and Configuration S86
11. The External signal Status page is shown as follows Refer to Section 8 5 Input Output Signal of the External Signal ASA 72749 Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status Information External signal Status Sensor level Printer Configuration Adjustment mode User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm Tfi MAC Address XX EXXOOCXX XX XX External signal Status Output information SPIN 1 16PIN APIN 1 PFIN OPIN 18FIN BPIN 18PIN Intput information TPIN 20FIN PIN 21PIN OPIN 22PIN 10FIN 23PIN S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 3 Sensor Level The Sensor level page is shown as follows Refer to Sensor Level Adjustments on page 120 Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm AS A2799 MAC Address XXOCXX XX XX XX Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status SEHSOENAM Trete I MARK E ADJUST LEVEL External signal Status I MARK R ADJUST LEVEL TERSURIENES I MARK R SLICE LEVEL l Printer Configuration GAP E ADJUST LEVEL He pae GAP R ADJUST LEVEL User mode Interface mode GAP R SLICE LEVEL Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Ot
12. lt 4 button Select ALT PROTOCOL lt 1 button Select PRINTER SETTING 4 button Select NO 4 button PRINTER SETTING YES Select YES 4 button Select YES Select YES 4 button 4 button ee ee m DEFAULT PRINTER SETTING Sutil USER 4 F 4 button DEFAULT SETTING COMPLETED Waiting to be powered off PLEASE POWER OFF DEFAULT MODE Select the item to be initialized PRINTER SETTING Initialize the printer setting ALT PROTOCOL Initialize the protocol code DEFAULT MODE WLAN SETTING Initialize the WLAN setting PRINTER SETTING Note TAL PROTOCOL i WLAN SETTING shows only if a wireless LAN unit is installed S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 181 4 Operation and Configuration DEFAULT PRINTER SETTING Select whether or not to initialize the printer setting YES Initialize the printer setting DEFAULT e NO Cancel and return to the DEFAULT MODE screen PRINTER SETTING NO Note 4k Shows only if DEFAULT MODE is set to PRINTER SETTING DEFAULT PRINTER SETTING SHIPPING USER Select the initialization type SHIPPING Initialize the printer to the shipping state DEFAULT e USER Initialize the printer to the state with the SAVE USER DEF PRINTER SETTING setting Salud USER 4 F Note e Shows only if DEFAULT PRINTER SETTING is set to YES f you have selected USER when the SAVE USER DEF is not registered the printer will
13. oystem commands that can be assigned priority are as follows Print Darkness lt E gt Print Darkness lt F gt Print Speed CS Position Offset A3 Print Mode PM Print Method PH RIBBON NEAR END Enable or disable the detection of the ribbon near end ENABLE Detect and notify when the ribbon is about to run out RIBBON NEAR END DISABLE Do not detect the ribbon near end mies DISABLE Note 4o Shows for the thermal transfer model only LABEL RE DETECT oet whether or not to re detect the label pitch when the power is on after the head opens closes ENABLE Re detect the label pitch LABEL RE DETECT DISABLE Do not re detect the label pitch SNE DISABLE 4 F S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 131 4 Operation and Configuration SET PASSWORD Enable or disable password input to various modes ON Password input is required to enter various modes SEI PASSWORD e OFF Password input is not required to enter various modes ON OFF You can enable password input for the following modes USER MODE INTERFACE MODE MEMORY MODE ADVANCED MODE HEX DUMP MODE and SERVICE MODE PASSWORD NO Set the four digit password for entering various modes Move the cursor using the lt P buttons change the value using the A V buttons and then press the ENTER button to confirm the password COMPATIBLE MODE Set the compatibility with the printer operation of existing models ON Keep the compati
14. 0 15 3 75 mm 0 15 Media feed direction Note The above base reference point print position will be the stop position when the sensor type is set to Gap sensor Adjust the print position using the following procedure 1 Make sure that the printer is in online mode or offline mode 2 Press the A and V buttons for one second to enter the adjustment mode PITCH POSITION PITCH POSITION shows on the screen 0 OOM 248 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 3 Change the setting value Press the A V buttons to set the desired value Set the offset value with to move the print position opposite the feed direction and value with to move the print position in the feed direction The setting value is adjustable by 0 25 mm 0 01 regardless of print resolution The setting range is from 3 75 mm 0 15 to 3 75 mm 40 157 4 Press the 1 ENTER button to save the setting and go to the next adjustment screen 6 3 3 Adjusting the Media Stop Position Adjustment Location See Range Adjustment Mode l Adjustment Mode Offset Position Position 3375 mmto 8 75 mm 75 mm to 3 75 mm 0 15 to 0 15 The stop position for options such as Dispenser is adjustable within the range of 3 75 mm to 3 75 mm 0 15 to 0 15 in the adjustment mode described above Dispensing Print position position Print head Media feed direction U Y
15. 4 Operation and Configuration CHARACTER BIT Set the RS 232C data length The following options are available 7BIT CHARACTER BIT all 7BIT OBIT Note e Shows only if the RS 232C interface is selected e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PROTOCOL Set the communication protocol READY BUSY When selected the printer will proceed to the RECEIVE BUFFER screen XON OFF When selected the printer will proceed to the RECEIVE BUFFER screen STATUS2 When selected the printer will proceed to the IGNORE CR LF screen STATUS3 When selected the printer will proceed to the IGNORE CR LF screen STATUS4 When selected the printer will proceed to the IGNORE CR LF screen STATUS5 When selected the printer will proceed to the ITEM NO CHECK screen Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again ITEM NO CHECK Set the item number check function ENABLE Enable the item number check function ITEM NO CHECK e DISABLE Disable the item number check function ENABLE MESZBE 4 F Note Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUS5 102 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration BCC CHECK Set the BCC check function ENABLE Enable the BCC check function BCC GHECK ENABLE DARIN is 4 F e DISABLE Disable the BCC check function Note Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUS5 RECEIVE BUFFER Set the receive b
16. 4 button I I X button SAVE TAT DORON X button SELECT MEMORY DESTINATION M B PY SELECT MEMORY ORIGIN SD CARD USB MEMORY SD CARD USB MEMORY 4 button 4 button Saving Yes Update Yes completed completed No 5 Reading the dat i READING eading the data READING Reading the data s__ gt S6 JE Finished receiving the uploaded data Finished receiving the uploaded data 5 Writing the data WRITING Writing the data s__ y JE Finished writing the uploaded data Finished writing the uploaded data LJ PRINTER SETTING 3 short beeps when saving to 3 short beeps when the upload COMPLETED memory is completed COMPLETE is completed PLEASE POWER OFF SLOT SETTING Select whether or not to set the memory storage allocation for use with the Memory card command lt CC gt YES Proceed to change the storage allocation for the memory slot SLOT SETTING NO Nochange to the memory slot Note Refer to the Programming reference for details on the command 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 113 4 Operation and Configuration CARD SLOT SELECT Set the memory storage allocation for each card slot for use with the Memory card command CC A total of three slots can be set Slot 0 2 Each card slot can be allocated to the following options CARD SLOT SELECT e RAM FROM Flash ROM SLOTO e SD SD card USB USB memory SLOTO MEE e NO USE E Note Other than the NO USE option a memory s
17. A head check error is detected when NORMAL has been selected for the HEAD CHECK setting screen Change the HEAD CHECK setting to BARCODE and continue the print job 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Replace the media the media Refer to Section 3 5 Loading Media for details Replace the ribbon Refer to Section 3 2 Loading the Ribbon for details Do not send data from the host until the analysis of received data is completed Check the print data Replace the print head Refer to Section 8 7 1 Replacing the Print Head for details 281 7 Troubleshooting Warning No Message LED Buzzer Cause Countermeasure Clean print head and platen roller 1 CLEAN HEAD amp PLATEN ROLLER Change print head Pu CHANGE PRINT HEAD Change platen roller 5 CHANGE PLATEN ROLLER Lights blue One short beep To clear the error Press the ENTER button Lights blue One short beep To clear the error Press the ENTER button Lights blue One short beep To clear the error Press the ENTER button 282 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual The set notification interval has been reached The set notification interval has been reached The set notification interval has been reached Gleaniheprintheadand the print head and platen roller Refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller for details Replace the print
18. B The printer enters the printer information mode S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 51 4 Operation and Configuration 4 1 3 Error Display and Icons When a printer error occurs the screen shows the following error messages and icons Error number icon Error icon gi Error message Shows the valid arrow button to switch the screen Countermeasure message SUPPORT CENTER e Error Icon Icon Description 7 3 52 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual zd em ce 4 Operation and Configuration Description Calendar error is detected Writing information to the RFID tag failed Wireless LAN setting error is detected Any printer error other than above is detected Error number according to the errors fa oe Qi o LJ Pn re ac gt z 4 1 4 Setting Display In various setting mode the setting display is shown as follows This section also describes the functions of the buttons in setting mode Selecting an item Goes to the setting mode menu UNCTION without saving the as setting v WAT C PRINT METHOD EB L 4 gt kms Save the setting t and go to the FEED next screen CANCEL S Heturns to the NEN previous screen Setting item Setting contents Valid arrow Select an item using the without saving display display buttons display A Y buttons the setting TRANSFER DIRECT X Goes to the setting LT mode menu r without sav
19. E A GRO OG m OO E Sorx SLOT SETTING button Select NO 4 Select YES A X button CARD SLOT SELECT T 4 button X button MEMORY MODE e a al ba ee ee EMORY SIZE button STORED CONTENTS or select BACK SETTING UPLOAD lt button S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 111 4 Operation and Configuration MEMORY CARD MODE 76 x m T D S O PLEASE SELECT MEMORY SD CARD USB MEMORY X button MEMORY SIZE X X GB XXXXXXXXXXBY TE 4 button 112 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual l l Select MEMORY SIZE 4 button 1 Ig button l X button PLEASE SELECT MEMORY SD CARD USB MEMORY A 4 button X button STORED CONTENTS FORM OVERLAY FORMAT I 4 button X button FORM OVERLAY BMP FILE XXX XXXXXXXXXXBY TE 1 4 button X button i FORM OVERLAY BMP FILE STORED No 001 002 003 004 005 010 011 Select STORED CONTENT 1 button Select FORMAT lt 4 button i X button PLEASE SELECT MEMORY SD CARD USB MEMORY YES X button or Select NO 4 FORMAT YES Select YES lt 1 FORMATTING SCE MEMORY FORMAT COMPLETED PRESS ENTER KEY 4 button 4 Operation and Configuration MEMORY CARD NODE 26 ant WO GOW PS Select SETTING Select SETTING UPLOAD
20. Enable or disable to save the printer operation log to a memory card e ENABLE Save the history data to a memory card SAVE PRINT LOG DISABLE Do not save the history data to a memory card ENABLE MESTSJBS 4 F S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 135 4 Operation and Configuration MEMORY SELECT select the storage memory for saving the printer operation log SD CARD or USB MEMORY can be selected MEMORY SELECT N CAUTION SD CARD Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before USB MEMORY connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card Note Shows only if SAVE PRINT LOG is set to ENABLE CLEAR PRINT LOG select whether or not to clear the history data in the memory card YES Clear the history data CLEAR PRINT LOG NO Do not clear the history data YES wW Note 4 ok Shows only if SAVE PRINT LOG is set to ENABLE OUTPUT PRINT LOG FROM SUBPORT Output the printer operation log to the sub port in real time when the status has changed OUTPUT PRINT LOG ENABLE Enable the sub port and output the history data from it FROM SUBPORT DISABLE Disable the sub port and do not output any history data from ENABLE MNUE it 4 Note Shows only if SAVE PRINT LOG is set to ENABLE 136 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration RIBBON TENSION ADJUS
21. INPUT SIGNAL PRINT START WOP in REPRINT gPin PAPER END Pin MACHINE ERR gPin L i Same PIN number is set PRINT END BPin E ni q ONLINE Pin Warning display shows Warning display shows when multiple PIN numbers are overlapped OVERLAP OVERLAP PRESS ENTER KEY PRESS ENTER KEY i i 5 Pin 8 5 Pin i S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 315 8 Appendix 8 6 Notification Function This section shows the media motion when the set notification interval has been reached You can set the notification function in the NOTIFICATION FUNCTION SETTING screen of the user mode menu Print head position Notification distance has been reached NE QTY 000000 ONL INE QTY 000003 e The counter is cleared by pressing the ENTER button while After three seconds the warning message is shown Start counting from 0 again e When resuming printing without pressing the lt 4 ENTER button Warning E BD the printer enters the offline mode and the counter is not cleared message PLATEN ROLLER The warning is shown again while in standby mode When the Pll LINE button is pressed the printer enters online or offline mode from the warning screen The same goes for other buttons entering each screen 316 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix When multiple notifications occur at the same time The warning screen can be changed by pressing the A V buttons i To release the warning press
22. counterclockwise to lock the print head 12 Press the feed roller and media sensor assembly down until the feed lock latch is locked 244 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 2 2 Maintenance using the Cleaning Sheet The maintenance procedure using the cleaning sheet is as follows 1 Make sure that the printer is in power off mode then disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet 2 Open the top cover CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 3 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head N CAUTION The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury 4 Place the cleaning sheet between the print head and the platen roller Note Align the rough side of the cleaning sheet adjacent to the print head 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 245 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 5 Turn the head lock lever counterclockwise to lock the print head 6 Using two hands pull the cleaning sheet away from the printer T After you pull out the cleaning sheet repeat steps 4 through 6 two or three more times When no more dirt appears on the cleaning sheet after you have pulled it out stop repeating these steps Turn the head lock lever clockwise to
23. resolution HOO The setting range is from 3 75 mm 0 15 to 43 75 mm 0 15 m OFFSET POSITON Correct the offset position Offset position refers to the dispense stop position set the offset value with to move the stop position opposite the feed OFFSET POSITION direction and value with to move the stop position in the feed direction The setting value is adjustable by 0 25 mm 0 01 regardless of the print mm resolution The setting range is from 3 75 mm 0 15 to 3 75 mm 0 15 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 61 4 Operation and Configuration Fine tune the print darkness The setting range is from 00 to 99 00 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest DARKNESS 3 After adjustment press the S FUNCTION button or X CANCEL button to exit the adjustment mode The printer enters offline mode Note Pressing the FUNCTION button or X CANCEL button before pressing the lt 4 ENTER button will not save the adjustment 4 Perform a test print after completing the adjustments to make sure that the settings are correct Refer to Section 4 2 17 Test Print Mode for details 62 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 6 Work Shift Setting Mode This mode allows for specific production shift information to be printed on a label when used with the printer SBPL command The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the work shift mode The table descri
24. 305 dpi S84 ex 609 dpi S86 ex 203 dpi 00000 to 09992 00000 to 14988 S86 ex 305 dpi Note Shows only if SIZE MODE is set to LCD Set the shift offset position of the label The setting range varies depending on the following model Shift moai Setting Range on S84 ex 203 dpi S84 ex 305 dpi S84 ex 609 dpi oet the top offset position of the label The setting range is from 120 to 120 The measurement unit is in dot 232 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode HEAD CHECK Specify the number of media between each head check The setting range is from 0000 to 9999 The head check function is disabled when the value is set to 0000 HEAD CHECK LABEL 0000 ah r PROTOCOL Set the SZPL communication protocol NONE PROTOCOL ACK ZEBRA Neg ACK ZEBRA 4 F RS485 NETWK ID Set the RS485 network ID The setting range is from 000 to 999 The network is not in used when the ID is set to 000 RS485 NETWK ID ID CONTROL HEADER Set the control header character The setting range is from 000 00H to 255 FFH CONTROL HEADER CHAR Set the command header character The setting range is from 000 00H to 255 FFH COMMAND HEADER CHAR S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 233 5 Emulation Mode DELIMIT CHAR Set the delimit character The setting range is from 000 00H to 255 FFH DELIMITER CHAR CHAR 5 2 1 Auto Emulation Mode Switching Function Aut
25. 49 mm 1 9 and is adjustable by 1 mm 0 04 steps Set the offset value with to move the print position opposite the feed direction and value with to move the print position in the feed direction CHARACTER CODE Set the character code to be used e UTF 8 Use UTF 8 for character encoding e UTF 16 Use UTF 16 for character encoding 4 Operation and Configuration PRINT SPEED MA IPS PRINT DARKNESS 06 oh m PITCH OFFSET mm CHARACTER CODE UIF 8 UIF 16 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 73 4 Operation and Configuration 2 BYTE FONTS Set the kanji code to be used GB18030 Set for use with simplified Chinese e BIG5 Set for use with traditional Chinese e KSX1001 Set for use with Korean The following kanji codes are available if GB18030 is selected MINCHO Print the kanji code using MINCHO GOTHIC Print the kanji code using GOTHIC NOTIFICATION FUNCTION SETTING Select whether or not to set the notification function e YES Set the notification function NO Do not set the notification function The screen returns to user mode Note For details on the media motion when the set notification interval has reached refer to Section 8 6 Notification Function NOTICE FUNCTION SELECT Select the items for notification CLEAN PRINTER Notify when to perform cleaning of the printer CHANGE ROLLER Notify when to perform replacement of the platen roller
26. ADVANCED MODE menu E T 4 button ee ee rae re ee ee ee ee ey X button a Shows only when a ribbon saver optional is installed 4 button MODE SELECT XML isl 4 F 4 button X button 1 JOB MODIFICATION ENABLE DIETSSINS 4 F A 4 button X button Select other than 0 ROTATE LABEL 4 button LABEL SIZE ADJ Shows only when ROTATE LABEL is set to other than O Edu WIDTH BERP DEG 90 180 d ee X button Select 0 4 button 4 button X button 0 LCD POWER SAVING NN MIN Ml jee arate vista lena X button other than 0 X button LABEL SIZE ADJ HE IGHT AOOO E T 4 button E ww 4 button X button LED INDICATION X button 4 button IGNORE Al 4 button X button RET SERERE 4 button Returns to the ADVANCED Ll X i I MODE screen 1 g TT 146 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration PRINTER TYPE Set the print mode DISPENSER Peel the liner from the printed label as it is advanced to PRINTER TYPE the printer s front Once the printed label has been removed by the applicator the next label will retract and position itself for printing DISPENSER CONTINUOUS Print the specified number of media The media CONT INUOUS remains in position for printing at all times LINERLESS Perform backfeed print and then feed each label to the applicator for cutting You can
27. CC A CC B GS1 DataBar Composite CC A CC B GS1 DataBar Truncated Composite CC A CC B GS1 DataBar Stacked Composite CC A CC B GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked Composite CC A CC B GS1 DataBar Expanded Composite CC A CC B GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional Composite CC A CC B GS1 DataBar Limited Composite CC A CC B GS1 128 Composite CC A CC B CC C Rotation Characters 0 90 180 270 Barcode Parallel 1 0 Parallel 2 180 Serial 1 90 Serial 2 270 Barcode Ratio 1 2 1 3 2 5 Any ratio is available Magnification Bitmap font Vertical 1 to 36 Horizontal 1 to 36 Barcode 1 to 36 354 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 12 7 Options Wireless LAN interface kit 1 2 Bluetooth kit 3 Linerless Only for S84 ex 4 RFID UHF kit Only for S84 ex 5 Ribbon saver Only for S84 ex 8 12 8 Accessories Accessories 1 AC power cord 2 Documentations Quick Guide Global Warranty Program leaflet etc 3 14 pin conversion cable 4 Ribbon core 8 12 9 Standards Standards Safety Standards UL60950 1 CSA22 2 No 60950 1 EN60950 1 GB4943 1 K60950 1 EMC Standards FCC15B Class A ICES 003 Class A EN55022 EN55024 KN22 KN24 GB9254 GB17625 1 AS NZS CISPR 22 EN 300 328 Environmental Standard ROHS directive six hazardous restricts the use of six hazardous materials RoHS listed below Hexavalent chromium Lead and lead compounds Mercury and mercury compou
28. Do not reflect the label feed stop timing on PREND output Print End PREND 0 Q0 msec Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 k Label feeding Pause Label feeding MOTION Reflect the label feed stop timing on PREND output Print Print End PREND 2 20 msec Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Label feeding Pause Label feeding 1 Note Shows only if you have installed the optional RFID kit and enabled the RFID mode BACKFEED SPEED opecify the backfeed speed FAST Set to a speed of six inches per second BACKFEED SPEED NORMAL Set to a speed of four inches per second FAST NORMAL 4 F EURO CODE oet the European currency symbol to a hex code The setting range is from 00 to FF hexadecimal EURO CODE 130 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration SELECT LANGUAGE Set the LCD language The following languages are available ENGLISH SELECT LANGUAGE e FRENCH GERMAN ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH PORTUGUESE ITALIAN CHINESE Simplified Chinese DUTCH RUSSIAN PRIORITY SETTING Set the priority for the system commands COMMAND Certain system commands that have been sent to the PRIORITY SETTING printer have the priority to overwrite the printer configuration set by the LCD operator panel COMMAND INTERNAL The above mentioned printer configuration set by the LCD INTERNAL operator panel will not be replaced by the sent command
29. GBS S84ex S86ex r04 31 07 150M 2015 SATO Corporation All rights reserved Table of Contents Table Of Contellls eni ERE Ee ME FIRED SU ey FEE CH M PIE EL teu eU PUE IPLE E 1 Before YOU lud Er 7 1 Parts IdentiliCcatIOD uiu susci oie ieee vmi ut Ez owo du EE DE Ee UPET EC EE ETUR DESEE 15 T T Brinter OrlentallOni iion din Roxy euu necun a dan ccun Ci e Drs uU EE UM E 15 1 2 Parts Identification of the Printer eese 16 LED a TONE NOW ERR PR UR NONO IET MENCHRPOR TR 16 12 9 REI VOW accidet atout t raptu rait redolet ence alas td HC CL PCI DUAM UE 17 hee Cul Te tial E ALTI UTERE 18 1 3 Parts on the Operator Panel ccccccsssseeceeseeecessseecenseeeeesseeeeesneeseenseesonseees 19 Ie E 6X2 16 gl a ene MR CR 19 53 22 EE NSFC eA TOS sect cette das fot td eons Notdienste ca UE ca bounced aan Nota ad 20 2wnstatling the PEIBEUBT siiceesssscccesieanesccadncntreedesvesasweanesecetxaettesdssencsweceuases 21 2 1 Installation Precautioris reos cen ve exd un ERU DE YECR E kxFEAVEEA EIAS E REMO EU FEE QE ESUI QURE FE SHE R 21 2 2 Installation SP ACC eius er eoe y aeu ink ette u censu cC save vds eu eEss eerte ee SR eC D uu Ev ea nnne 22 22 Front Vilew 594 ex 596 6 DIMMED iota oor EpL n ad ela t ete m o EDeE sean 22 2 2 2 Rear View 884 ex S86 ex printer seeeesseeesssseessesseeeeeeee nennen 23 2 2 3 Media Dispens
30. Note Automatically shows the PRINTER SETTING COMPLETED screen upon completion PRINTER SETTING COMPLETED Shows when the printer setting information has been uploaded to the printer Note Three beeps will sound when the upload is completed e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 118 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual SELECT MEMORY ORIGIN SD CARD USB MEMORY 5 READING SC X 5 WRITING SC 9E PRINTER SETTING COMPLETED PLEASE POWER OFF 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 12 Service Mode In the SERVICE MODE menu you can perform sensor level adjustments and various function settings of the printer Press 4 gt Aor V button to select item accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Shows only when the PASSWORD input is enabled SENSOR LEVEL SETTING SERVICE MODE oelect one from the two service setting modes e SENSOR LEVEL Adjust the sensor level SERVICE MODE SENSOR LEVEL SETTING SETTING Set the various function settings of the printer S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 119 4 Operation and Configuration Sensor Level Adjustments The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the sensor level adjustments The table describes each setting screen in detail Press the 4 gt A or VW button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen SERVICE MODE
31. PREFIX LENGTH A button 94 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value l L accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen x Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the i INTERFACE MODE menu n eee Se ee a X button i Shows only WIRELESS MODE when the Wireless LAN Infrastructure a adapter is I I I installed and I button wi AN is X button selected I I SSID SATO PRINTER I I I I I I lt button X button CHANNEL er Ix button Shows only when STATUS5 Is selected 4 button X button BCC CHECK ENABLE RNS Hs 4 F rX button 1 Shows only i when STATUS4 1 is selected l A button F 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 95 4 Operation and Configuration DHCP SETTING Enable or disable DHCP ENABLE Enable DHCP DHCP SETTING ENABLE BARJA 4 F DISABLE Disable DHCP Note e Shows only if the LAN or WLAN interface is selected e he setting for the WLAN interface will be effective only if you power on the printer again IPv4 ADDRESS Set the IPv4 address The setting range is from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 The default value is 192 168 001 001 Pv4 ADDRESS Note 192 168 001 001 e Shows only if the LAN or WLAN interface is selected im he setting will be effective only if you power o
32. Signal Interfaces when RFID Module is Enabled Standard specification is applied when the RFID module is set to DISABLE Functions shown by shading are applied when the RFID module is set to ENABLE Signal Name Standard Specification 25 pins 14 pins RFID Module Disabled RFID Module Enabled 5 6 Print end signal PREND Print end signal PREND 6 s Oe Oe OW EE ae Label Near End Label Near End L UB 7o Reprint signal PRIN2 Reprint signal PRIN2 CECI e T e a w m x 9 O m w sv o x 2 Gb Ribbon End HFID Tag Error Output Paper End Paper End Ribbon End Output Ribbon Near End Ribbon Near End eile oe o Te Print start signal PRIN Print start signal PRIN Label Feed Label Feed 346 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 11 4 RFID Printing Tips Recommended non printable zone Avoid printing barcodes or characters directly on top of an RFID chip The uneven surface will negatively affect the print quality Note The tag offset is adjusted from the base reference point The base reference point differs depending on the media sensor you use Refer to Section 6 3 1 About the Base Reference Point for details When gap sensor is used the tag offset is adjusted from the tip of the label When I mark sensor is used the tag offset is adjusted from the position after the I mark 8 Appendix 4 Media feed direction The position for the best write success
33. When STATUSS is selected BCC CHECK DISABLE When STATUSS is selected STATUS REPLY TIMING ENQ When STATUS4 is selected PROTOCOL STATUSS ITEM NO CHECK DISABLE When STATUSS is selected BCC CHECK DISABLE When STATUSS is selected RECEIVE BUFFER 1ITEM When STATUSA is selected Ye IEEE1284 ACK SIGNAL 00 5us When 1ITEM is selected S S BAUDRATE 19200 ITEM NO CHECK DISABLE When STATUSS is selected RECEIVE BUFFER 1ITEM When READY BUSY XON Yes Yes XOFF is selected Protocol STATUS5 ITEM NO CHECK DISABLE When STATUSS is selected Yes BCC CHECK DISABLE When STATUSS is selected 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 293 8 Appendix Default Default Setting Item Initial Value Shipping Bluetooth PARAWETERSETINGUPS eo Ye w PARAWETERSETINGUPSW o Ye w orco Sus Xe We Des Ye Yes Yes Wewmr e o m De isis in IEEE 1284 DISABLE oe No NTP IPv4 ADDRESS IPv4 000 000 000 000 Yes No NTP IPv6 ADDRESS IPv6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Fwomw E omeE e w GNE T NN RN RN SNMP SE NULL COMMUNTYWRITE WRITE DISABLE uu h a wmo noe M o TRAP TYPE SELECT SNMPv2c 294 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix ar Default Default Setting Item Initial Value Shipping mws a Ne NS ap meno oemumem fo e 0000 0000 0000 0000 TRAP IPv6 ADR 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 1 4 Memory Mode 0 Sewetem ave Rat
34. X button I D button 4 button gt button X button 4 button Select NO 2 button DATA EXISTS OVERWRITE YES 4 F Select YES 4 button D button RECEIVE DATA COPYING SAVE COMPLETED PRESS ENTER KEY 4 button 7 rag ge 2 Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen A button Press for 5 seconds Select LOAD 4 button INTERFACE SELECT 4 button gt button i c STD USB MEMORY X button 4 button Taon shows only when there is SET START NUMBER sequelae 2 button X X DIGIT 01 0000000000000001 Az gD button I 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 65 4 Operation and Configuration N CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card Note lt is also possible to register recall and print a SBPL command file that is prepared in advance as a simple standalone data and save it to the SD card or USB memory Prepare the data according to the following
35. change the value Press the lt ENTER button to save the value and proceed to the next setting screen Note e When the authentication name is less than 8 characters there will be buzzer sounds and it will not move to the next screen Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again Input SNMP trap authentication user name Press the lt P buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to change the value Press the lt ENTER button to save the value and proceed to the next setting screen Note e Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again AUTH PROTOCOL Select SNMP trap authentication protocol The options are as follows NONE e MD5 e SHA 1 Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 4 Operation and Configuration COMMUNITY NAME i USER NAME AUTH PROTOCOL NONE MDS S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 89 4 Operation and Configuration AUTH KEY Input SNMP trap authentication key Input more than 8 characters for the authentication name Press the lt P buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to AUTH KEY change the value a Press the lt ENTER button to save
36. direction dot S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 309 8 Appendix Mirror rotation setting lt RM gt 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e The maximum value for the horizontal direction dot Graphics print lt G gt 168 152 128 252 228 e The maximum byte for the horizontal direction Media size lt A1 gt 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 The maximum label width dot Base offset setting A3 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e The maximum value for the horizontal direction offset dot Printer operation register setting PG 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 The maximum label width dot Printer operation register setting PC 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 The maximum label width dot Form overlay registration amp S 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e The maximum horizontal direction available range dot Graphics registration Gl 168 152 128 252 228 e The maximum byte for the horizontal direction Print configuration request lt SOH MG gt 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 The maximum label width dot Print configuration request lt SOH MG gt 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e The maximum offset value for the horizontal base point dot 310 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 3 3 Print Head Width and Printable Area Range Printable width Printable width Li Ph MM MD Mh Mh Mh iD DT S86 ex Americas Opposite Left Hand S86 ex Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Right Hand printer Europe Asia Left Hand printer Base re
37. i i LAN IPv6 ROUTER 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 X button LAN MAC ADDRESS lt button XX YX XX XX X an LLL LL LLL LLL LLL LLL XX 1 4 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the INFORMATION MODE menu Shows only when a WLAN IP ADDRESS wireless LAN unit is 192 168 Ll 1 installed button WLAN MAG ADDRESS XX XX XX XX XX BD ADDRESS XX XX XX XX XX X button 1 Shows with the following i conditions 1 Manual setting DISABLE Auto settings l l l not confirmed Auto settings confirmed IEEE1284 RS 232C LAN USB WLAN Bluetooth 4 button 4 Operation and Configuration Version Shows the model name and firmware version of this printer Version 84 ex 203dpi Ver 61 00 00 00 SERIAL NO Shows the serial number of the control board in this printer SERIAL NO S N 00000000 LAN IPv4 ADDRESS Shows the IPv4 address of the LAN LAN IP ADDRESS Note If the IP address is not acquired from DHCP it will be shown as 128 212 1 5 LAN IPv6 ADDRESS Shows the IPv6 address of the LAN LAN IPv6 ADDRESS Note 0000 0000 0000 a 0000 0000 0000 If the IP add df DHCP Il be sh t E d NESS S Noracquire rom It will De shown a
38. 05 987654 12 52 p button 2 MAC address i l dina 3 MAC address lower 6 digits l button 4 Used channel 5 RSSI value dBm absolute value l i i button X button Sbution AP PRINT SIZE iq i gt button Home eee ees AP PRINT PRESS ENTER KEY AP PRINT PRINTING i In Site survey mode the printer prints only one label After the print completion or error release the Print completion printer returns to the list screen Site survey mode stops when powered off 194 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual SITE SURVEY START This is the initial screen of the site survey mode Press the lt 4 ENTER button to start the site survey If Infrastructure is selected in the WIRELESS MODE of the WLAN interface setting the printer goes to the SITE SURVEY SEARCHING screen If Ad Hoc is selected in the WIRELESS MODE of the WLAN interface setting the printer goes to the Ad Hoc mode screen SITE SURVEY SEARCHING The printer is acquiring information necessary for the site survey The field intensity channel and MAC address for a maximum of sixty four access points will be searched After acquiring the information the printer automatically goes to the next screen Note Shows only if the WIRELESS MODE of the WLAN interface setting is set to Infrastructure Ad Hoc mode NO SEARCHING This is a warning screen when the site survey mode is started if the WIRELESS
39. 1 4 Setting Display 4 1 1 Normal Mode Display and Icons In normal mode the screen shows the following printer status Trace mode status icon mE WLAN field intensity Warning icons status icon or Bluetooth connection status icon SD card icon Buzzer volume icon or emulation icon when emulation module is loaded E Printer mode icon fae in Message display USB memory icon e Printer mode LLL Description Shows when the printer is in online mode Shows when the printer is in offline mode Shows when the printer is in test print mode and hex dump print mode Shows when the printer is in download mode Shows when the printer is in upload mode shows when the printer is in memory mode 584 ex 886 ex Operator Manual 47 4 Operation and Configuration e race mode status o LLLLLLUeseipion E Em Shows after receiving any data while trace mode is ENABLE RC B Shows after receiving ESC 1BH A while trace mode is ENABLE Shows after print operation while trace mode is ENABLE WLAN field intensity status Description Infrastruct Ad Hoc ure Mode Mode Mode The meaning of this icon differs depending on the wireless LAN meaning of this icon differs depending on the wireless LAN mode In Infrastructure mode Shows when the field intensity is more than level 3 and the printer is connected to an access point In Ad Hoc mode Always shows when the printer is connected
40. 10 Press the ENTER button to start the sensor adjustment 256 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual SENSOR SELECT MARK GAP INSERT WHITE AREA OF LABELS UNDER SENSOR PRESS ENTER KEY REMOVE LABEL PLACE LINER UNDER SENSOR PRESS ENTER KEY Media sensors 11 The sensor adjustment result shows CALIBRATION COMPLETE shows when the automatic adjustment has succeeded CALIBRATION FAILED shows when the automatic adjustment has failed 12 Press the 1 ENTER button to proceed to next screen 13 Press the A Y buttons to select the following function and then press the 4 ENTER button EXIT CALIBRATION Exit the automatic sensor adjustment mode Select EXIT CALIBRATION if COMPLETE is shown in step 11 The printer returns to SERVICE MODE setting screen RETRY Retry the automatic sensor adjustment Select RETRY if FAILED is shown in step 11 The printer goes to SENSOR SELECT screen and repeat steps 6 through 12 Note 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments CALIBRATION COMPLETE PRESS ENTER KEY CALIBRATION FAILED PRESS ENTER KEY CALIBRATION EXIT CALIBRATION RETRY A If CALIBRATION FAILED shows in step 11 clean the media sensor and repeat the above steps for auto adjustment Select RETRY in step 13 If the problem persists adjust the media sensor sensitivity level manually Refer to the following procedures for manual adjustment 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 25 6 Cleaning
41. 104 0 mm Print head width and printable width Print Head Density 12 dots mm 305 dpi 24 dots mm 609 dpi 107 mm 4 21 312 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 108 mm 4 25 S84 ex S84 ex Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Left Hand printer Printable area 112 0 mm S84 ex 203dpi S8408 S04 ex 305dpi 58412 S04 ex 609dpi 58424 Printable width 104 0 mm 8400 Print Head Printable Print Head Printable Width Width Width Width 104 mm 4 09 104 mm 4 09 104 mm 4 09 112 mm 4 41 106 6 mm 4 2 104 mm 4 09 104 mm 4 09 104 mm 4 09 104 mm 4 09 8 Appendix 0 4 LCD Power Saving Mode This function is designed to reduce power consumption by setting the LCD backlight to off when the printer is not operated for a specified period of time The time required for the LCD backlight to light off can be set at LCD POWER SAVING setting screen in the advanced mode Refer to Section 4 2 13 Advanced Mode for the flowchart to access the setting The setting procedure of the LCD power saving mode is as follows 1 in offline mode press the ENTER button The printer changes to setting mode menu 2 select the ADVANCED MODE using the 4 V lt gt buttons and then press the 3 ENTER button 3 Press the ENTER button again until LCD POWER SAVING shows on the LCD POWER SAVING screen 4 Press the A Y buttons to
42. 179 4 Operation and Configuration LABEL LENGTH set the length of the test print The setting range is from 5 to 20 cm and is adjustable by 1 cm LABEL LENGTH Note Shows only if TEST PRINT MODE is set to CONFIGURE LIST itn E r PITCH POSITION OFFSET POSITION DARKNESS Adjust the print position offset position and print darkness The setting range for both PITCH POSITION and OFFSET POSITION is 3 75 mm 0 15 and is adjustable by 0 25 mm 0 01 PITCH POSITION The setting range for DARKNESS is from 00 to 99 mm JOFFSET POSITION Note mm Press the lt ENTER button to start the test print DARKNESS ENTER gt PRINT TEST PRINT PRESS ENTER KEY The test print is in progress Press the ENTER button while printing to pause the test print operation Press the ENTER button again to continue TEST PRINT PRESS ENTER KEY 180 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 18 Default Setting Mode The printer can be reset to the default setting as in the factory preset The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the default setting mode The table describes each setting screen in detail Press the X button Power On DEFAULT MODE Press the gt A or V button to select an item accordingly The PRINTER SETTING active arrow icons are shown on the screen WLAN SETTING is available only when a wireless LAN unit is installed Select WLAN SETTING
43. 219 5Emulation MOQO 1 15 rici cd voi ecvEsse cuve uoo e cw o Une Dr ouv niei eUED newest 221 5 1 Emulation Module LOAGGN i ccs ence e con ea een soa eco eO Ce eer x era yute sea aaa 221 5 1 1 Loading the Emulation Module cccccccsseeeceseeeeceeseeseeeseeseseeeseaeeessageessageeeeas 222 5 1 2 Deleting the Emulation MOUIE cccccccsseecccseeeeceeseeceeeeeeseseeeseseeseseesseneeeees 224 5 1 3 Downloading the Emulation Module c ccccccesececseeeeeceeeceeseceeseeeeesenseeeeeneeeees 226 51 4 Emulation Module Error itae ca lace eio rea cu etl ine ctae ec eae itn ed e er alot 229 5 22 SZPL Em lation MOQOG 5 inei vivace a uaa ni Lc oasucuceus annaa raaa iii 230 5 2 1 Auto Emulation Mode Switching Function cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeesaaees 234 5 3 SDPE Emulation Mode oii reatu oh Saco ua ECo ce Eas kaEosaEH is Vaca Ex2 Esa Us uisi CENE ETE 235 5 4 SIPE Emulation Mode eie etat oo Ree eo nz avec o uz ue pa euo RE o guv cU Ne ra edu cas ee eU vu aea ro nnnm 239 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 241 6 T MAING ANG Gs E RN 241 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller 242 6 2 1 Maintenance using the Cleaning Kit 242 6 2 2 Maintenance using the Cleaning SNeet cccceesecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeessaaes 245 6 3 Adjusting the Base Reference Point
44. 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 2 unsine head lockiever cowe unlock the print head 3 Pull the feed lock latch to unlock the feed roller and media sensor assembly The feed roller and media sensor assembly will flip open 4 Pull the media guide away from the printer 5 Pass the media between the media shaft below the feed roller and media sensor assembly and the print head assembly and extend it out the discharge outlet Make sure that the end of the media extends out the discharge outlet 6 Push the media until the innermost edge of the media lightly touches the printer center frame F Pull the label out from the discharge outlet Remove about 30 cm 11 8 of labels from the liner 44 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 8 Push the pressure roller release tab up to release the pressure roller plate 9 Pass the liner through the gap of the pressure roller plate 10 Push the center of the pressure roller plate 4 to latch it in place 11 Turn the head lock lever counterclockwise to lock the print head 12 Close the top cover 13 After loading the media and ribbon perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly Refer to the Section 4 2 17 Test Print Mode for details on how to perform a test print N CAUTION When closing the top cover be careful not to pinch your fingers 584 ex S86 ex Operator M
45. 32 to 6 97 Length 600 m 1968 5 ft when width is equal or more than 59 mm 2 32 Wind Direction Face out Face in Roll Diameter 108 mm 4 25 Core Diameter 25 6 mm 1 017 Media Use genuine media made by SATO Media roll Face in wound face out wound fan fold media Continuous Mode 6 to 2500 mm 0 24 to 98 42 6 to 1500 mm 0 24 to 59 06 6 to 400 mm 0 24 to 15 75 6 to 1249 mm 0 24 to 49 17 6 to 1249 mm 0 24 to 49 17 With Liner 9 to 2503 mm 0 35 to 98 54 9 to 1503 mm 0 35 to 59 17 There is a restriction 9 to 403 mm 0 35 to 15 87 with the speed for the 9 to 1252 mm 0 35 to 49 29 small pitch label 9 to 1252 mm 0 35 to 49 29 Width 10 to 128 mm 0 39 to 5 04 51 to 177 mm 2 01 to 6 97 With Liner 13 to 131 mm 0 51 to 5 16 54 to 180 mm 2 13 to 7 09 350 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Media Use genuine media made by SATO Size Dispense Mode Pitch Thermal transfer model 10 to 356 mm 0 39 to 14 02 Direct thermal model 15 to 356 mm 0 59 to 14 02 With Liner Thermal transfer model 13 to 359 mm 0 51 to 14 13 Direct thermal model 18 to 359 mm 0 71 to 14 13 Width 10 to 128 mm 0 39 to 5 04 51 to 177 mm 2 01 to 6 97 With Liner 13 to 131 mm 0 51 to 5 16 54 to 180 mm 2 13 to 7 09 Thickness Label and 0 05 to 0 31 mm 0 002 to 0 012 liner 8 12 3 Interface Sta
46. 4 F 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 75 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 10 Interface Mode The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the interface mode The table describes each setting screen in detail INTERFACE MODE gt 22 SOT eI D ies i X button Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the INTERFACE MODE menu Shows only when the PASSWORD input is enabled PRESS ENTER KEY TO CHANGE 4 POWER OFF TO SAVE button 4 button X button NTERFACE AUTO SELECT ENABLE DRESS aS 4 F 4 button X button INTERFACE Select NO 4 button Select YES 44 X button button PORT SELECT Select SUB PORT 23 button DATA PORT SUB PORT 2 Select DATA PORT i X button 4 button X button l DATA PORT i LAN l Select NONE 2 button l l Bluetooth amp Select USB LAN RS 232C IEEE1284 l Bluetooth WLAN button 4 button ers E sme s ERE UT Setting contents vary depending on the interface To the USB setting qu To the IEEE1284 setting I D To the LAN WLAN setting EP To the Bluetooth setting E gt To the RS 232C setting 4 button 76 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration
47. 4 mm sec 305 dpi 4 to 14 inches sec 101 6 to 335 6 mm sec 609 dpi 2 to 6 inches sec 50 8 to 152 4 mm sec 203 dpi 4 to 14 inches sec 101 6 to 335 6 mm sec 305 dpi 4 to 12 inches sec 101 6 to 304 8 mm sec 203 dpi 8 dots mm 305 dpi 12 dots mm 609 dpi 24 dots mm 203 dpi 8 dots mm 305 dpi 12 dots mm Pitch direction Excludes liner Top 1 5 mm 0 06 Bottom 1 5 mm 0 06 Width direction Excludes liner Left 1 5 mm 0 06 Right 1 5 mm 0 06 S84 ex 203 dpi Length 2500 mm 98 42 x Width 104 mm 4 09 305 dpi Length 1500 mm 59 05 x Width 104 mm 4 09 609 dpi Length 400 mm 15 75 x Width 104 mm 4 09 203 dpi Length 1249 mm 49 17 x Width 167 5 mm 6 59 305 dpi Length 1249 mm 49 17 x Width 167 5 mm 6 59 Print Darkness Darkness level 1 to 10 l mark Reflective Type G a O Head Open Top Cover Open Media Sensor Assembly Open Label End Sensor Ribbon End Sensor Ribbon Supply Sensor Sensitivity Adjustable Position and sensitivity Adjustable Transmissive Type Detect with l mark sensor S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 349 8 Appendix 8 12 2 Ribbon and Media Ribbon Use genuine ribbon made by SATO Width 25 mm to 128 mm 0 98 to 5 04 Length 450 m 1476 4 ft when width is less than 39 5 mm 1 55 600 m 1968 5 ft when width is equal or more than 39 5 mm 1 55 Width 59 mm to 177 mm 2
48. CAUTION Do not remove the USB memory while the printer is accessing the data in the USB memory Doing so may result in data corruption 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 35 2 Installing the Printer This page is intentionally left blank 36 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Loading the Ribbon and Media This printer supports two types of print methods namely thermal transfer and direct thermal Thermal transfer is a print method that transfers the ink of the ribbon to the media Direct thermal is a print method that creates the image on direct thermal media Ribbon is not necessary if you are using direct thermal media 3 1 Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon There are two wind directions for the ribbon Face out means the ink is on the outer side and Face in means the ink is on the inner side This printer supports both wind directions You can examine the ink side of the ribbon using the following procedure 1 Place the outer side of the ribbon onto the media touching 2 scratch the inner side of the ribbon with your fingernail or a pointed object 3 If there is a mark on the media the ink is coated on the outer side of the ribbon The ink is coated on the inner side Face in ribbon The ink is coated on the outer side Face out ribbon x om en 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 3 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 3 2 Loading the Ribbon Use genuine media and ribbons for the printer for optimum pri
49. COMPLETED screen Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE MODULE DOWNLOAD COMPLETED This screen shows the completion of the download Three beeps will sound when the module download is completed If downloading through INTERFACE it will return to the DOWNLOAD READY screen If downloading through SD CARD or USB MEMORY press the ENTER button to return to the INTERFACE SELECT screen READING XX XX The printer is reading the module data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data reading progress XX XX shows the file number being read and total number of files After reading the module data it goes to the WRITING screen Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to SD CARD or USB MEMORY WRITING XX XX The printer is writing the module data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data writing progress XX XX shows the file number being read and total number of files After writing the module data it goes to the VERIFYING screen Note shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to SD CARD or USB MEMORY 228 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 VERIFYING O iis MODULE DOWNLOAD COMPLETED 5 READING XX XX D 5 WRITING C XX XX VERIFYING XX XX The printer is verifying the module data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data verification progress XX XX shows the file number being read and tot
50. Cannot Print eese 285 TAA Bag cdam emet EET 286 TAO aeeldi o PRNE POSIUOM sce E E E 287 7 5 Interface Troubleshooting Lees Leere erre eene enne 288 SMS SI TT m mE 288 TOL LAN Ethernet HATCH ACG sioe et etu acted e n ear EN 288 5 93 Bl eloothntertace ODOM al sca Danai tio aiti ceb a Us E d D atin 288 ROA Ho 232G Interlaee sui idea t NEED equi Denies Desa pete tudieSu Ou eae S A estu iUos Du uE 289 FOO NBER E1284 IDIer T Gee Rod oblsise diaeta issa Cm uem me uei ee AN LU bL PS Ed c eee Edison Dd chess 289 7 5 6 External Signal Interface EXT cccccccceececeeceeseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaaeeesaeeesees 289 7 5 7 Wireless LAN Interface ODbtIOnal s siete iex env E Ert e EU d 290 4 S84 ex 586 ex Operator Manual Table of Contents SAD DC NGI deer EA 291 8 1 EISTOPIMIUAl auaa 291 Sod IMOMMAL ModE s orco oibus sakasehecnticants acetceusse hee entre uiaaieebeumc hove outed oiteonetaeeeceeeeees 291 Slice US ModE c 291 Sled Interface IMOGUQ si eieveti uen i E ie eucc eade ort tegr etas Le be se Tuner uU uL dereud 292 93 4 MICIMORY IVIDO uou ioni aeuo der 3a ot thoai aas Taie trao ta bota Dua stewed severe tian cb nem A ue aS 295 em L SAdvanced ee UU TT 295 By WO rte I OID MOGE dm 298 oe PY fa MIRABILE 298 C2126 eS PINE MOOG EU I UU m 299 61 9 D
51. DISABLE before perform test print e When RFID mode is enabled RFID related information is printed on the second page of the CONFIGURATION test print 1 8 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration TEST PRINT MODE Select the test print contents CONFIGURATION Print the configuration settings of the printer TEST PRINT MODE BARCODE Print the barcodes installed in this printer CONFIGURATION HEAD CHECK Print the head check pattern of the selected media size BARCODE area MEMORY Print the contents of the memory in this printer FONT Print the contents of the fonts installed in this printer CONFIGURE LIST Print the configure list of the printer Note WLAN shows only if a wireless LAN unit is installed FACTORY Perform the factory test print or WLAN Print the wireless LAN settings of the printer TEST PRINT SIZE set the width of the test print in 1 cm steps The setting range varies depending on the model as follows Model Name Setting Range Default cm Value cm TEST PRINT SIZE acm oa r TEST PRINT SIZE Note Shows only if TEST PRINT MODE is set to CONFIGURATION BARCODE or HEAD CHECK TEST PRINT SIZE Select the width of the test print from LARGE or SMALL The available width varies depending on the model as follows Model Name LARGE cm SMALL cm LARGE SMALL Note Shows only if TEST PRINT MODE is set to FACTORY or WLAN 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual
52. ENABLE v 7 a IGNORECRAF No Printer Configuration IGNORE CAN DLE NO 7 Adjustment mode PORT SELECT DATA PORT LAN User mode Interface mode PORT SELECT SUB PORT NONE Y Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate LAN DATA PORT SUB PORT Memory mode DHCPv4 SETTING ENABLE Service mode Advanced mode IPv4 ADDRESS 192 168 1 1 RFID mode Emulation mode IPv4 SUBNET MASK 255255 255 0 S sre IPv4 GATEWAY ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 IPvV6 RESOLUTION MANUAL T IPv6 ADDRESS 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Pretix 064 DEFAULT ROUTER 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 PORT NUMBER 1 01024 1 65535 PORT NUMBER 01025 1 65535 PORT NUMBER3 09100 1 65535 PROTOCOL STATUSS STATUS REPLY TIMING ENQ T ITEM NO CHECK DISABLE BCC CHECK DISABLE T SNTP SNTP FUNCTION DISABLE IPv4 6 select IPv4 Y NTP IPv4 ADDRESS NTP IPvG ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 DoO00 0000 D000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 TIME ZONE HOUR MINUTE o Y ERROR NOTICE DISABLE Y i Submit Note Reapply the setting data update after the system reboots S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 203 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 7 Interface Mode SNMP Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the Interface mode SNMP page is shown as follows continued to the next page Refer to SNMP FUNCTION on page 84 NAVAS Ceaseless Creativity for
53. LAN RS 232C IEEE1284 Bluetooth WLAN Wireless LAN The optional Bluetooth and optional wireless LAN are available if you have installed them You cannot select the interface that has already been set for the DATA PORT Note The main port and sub port cannot simultaneously use the same interface Data port SBPL command Print data Printer status Sub port Printer status 30 S 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 2 Installing the Printer 2 5 4 Interface Combination The interface combinations that can be used for the data port and sub port are as follows Data Port USB LAN RS 232C IEEE1284 Bluetooth WLAN Le HE 0 9 9 X 9 9 Bluetooth o o o o jx o WAN x o o o o XT NONE o o o o o o o configurable x not configurable Note The optional Bluetooth and optional wireless LAN are available if you have installed them Do not select the same interface for the data port and sub port If you have installed the optional wireless LAN you cannot use the USB interface The optional wireless LAN is connected to the printer through the USB The sub port cannot be used if you have set ENABLE in the INTERFACE AUTO SELECT screen When WLAN is configured for the data port or sub port but the printer is powered on without the wireless LAN adapter the configured interface setting is changed from WLAN to USB When USB is configured as the data port or sub port
54. MODE of the WLAN interface setting is set to Ad Hoc Power on the printer again 4 Operation and Configuration SITE SURVEY START SITE SURVEY SEARCHING Ad Hoc mode NO SEARCHING S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 195 4 Operation and Configuration SITE SURVEY INFORMATION These screens show the information of the site survey In the first line on the upper screen to the right 01 indicates the strongest field density 123456 indicates the last six digits of the MAC address 01 indicates the channel in use and 18 indicates the absolute RSSI value in dBm Each screen shows four access points You can use the A V buttons to toggle between screens A maximum of sixty four access points can be shown You can show the full MAC address twelve digits by pressing the lt gt buttons as shown below 01 123456 01 18 button 01 002233123456 02 789ABC 10 25 02 002233789ABC 03 AAAAAA 08 26 button 03 003456AAAAAA 04 393939 08 45 04 0011AA393939 NOT FOUND AP This screen shows when the printer cannot find an access point Note Press the X CANCEL button to return to the SITE SURVEY START screen and try again AP PRINT SIZE Select the print size for the site survey information LARGE Print the information with a width of 10 cm e SMALL Print the information with a width of 4 cm AP PRINT PRESS ENTER KEY The printer is ready to perform printing Press the lt ENTER button to start th
55. Manual Appendix 8 1 List of Initial Values The initial value refers to the setting value of the printer when it was shipped from the factory If you reset the printer in default setting mode the setting values of the printer will change back to the factory default values The tables below show the initial value of each setting item and the type of reset that changes the value back to the initial value N CAUTION It is generally not necessary to perform the initialization Doing so will remove all the customer settings 8 1 1 Normal Mode Default Default ADJUSTMENT MODE 8 1 2 User Mode Default Default PRINT SPEED S84 ex 38 dots mm 06 IPS Yes Yes 12 dots mm 06 IPS 24 dots mm 03 IPS S86 ex 8 dots mm 06 IPS 12 dots mm 06 IPS 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 291 8 Appendix Default Default Setting Item Initial Value Shipping NOTICE FUNCTION DISABLE 8 1 3 Interface Mode 0 Setingtem muave NM On UwemwecESEyWG oo oo oo IPv6 ADDRESS 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 BCC CHECK DISABLE When STATUSS is selected STATUS REPLY TIMING ENQ When STATUSA is selected 2902 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Default Default Setting Item Initial Value Shipping DHCP SETTING DISABLE IPv4 ADDRESS 192 168 001 001 IPv4 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 000 IPv4 GATEWAY ADR 192 168 001 002 SSID SATO PRINTER PROTOCOL STATUS5 ITEM NO CHECK DISABLE
56. Mode RFID User Mode Information Mode Test Print Mode Default Setting Mode Download Mode Upload Mode Hidden Setting Mode Wireless LAN Certificate Download Mode Site Survey Mode S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual OO 4 Operation and Configuration The flow chart provides a clear summary of all the modes and their access methods Power on INITIALIZING S84 ex XXXdpi VER 61 XX XX XX Online state X button ONLINE QTY 000000 OFFLINE QTY 000000 ONLINE MODE meat RFID i af vl Lj 4 gt buttons USER MODE 26 P 7 1 RFID gi L5 lt gt buttons INTERFACE MODE 26 SC T 9i D Es i lt gt buttons MEMORY CARD MODE 26 onl T 9l 265 s lt gt buttons lt gt buttons 26 s 7 T RFID 1 g TT 4 buttons HEX DUMP MODE 26 e 7 T vi p es i ae RN NN NN cccscsllclll7cccs2125kINSLcctc 7 7 5 17ll7l77777t 77 clltcccccllll l bb7bsts7btcctcscclttbtccccdktlc1lllcb7sccbdchkllltl l bb7ssbllls7bscbtscgcclccJckckcllre RFID USER MODE 26 5 7 T vl L2 iD e UT T7 ER e butions INFORMATION MODE 26 5 7 T ROGER 56 S 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Print pause request Ld L mom um um um um Um EM Um Um Um Um Um apse oum um MI buttons Press for 5 seconds Work Shift Setting Mode Sound Adjustment A button A V buttons Adjustment second M
57. OFF EAPPEAPInAuth PEAP internal 0 MSCHAPv2 authentication PEAP server 0 OFF EAPFASTPacAuto EAPCertKey File size of the secret key WLANRegionCode 0 LEAP 1 EAP TLS 802 1x authentication CA route certification file SIZE WPA802 1x authentication WPAEAP authenticated user name WPAEAP Authentication password TTLS internal authentication PAC file auto provisioning Regional code 0 64 characters 0 32 characters Y 8 Appendix Default 2 EAP TTLS 3 EAP PEAP 4 EAP FAST Yes EAP TLS PS S S TKIP S sato printer Y Y Y Y S NULL S NULL e e e e e e S NULL 0 LEA 1 EAP TLS 2 EAP TTLS 3 EAP PEAP 4 EAP FAST Yes EAP TLS Yes NULL e S NULL 0 PAP 1 CHAP 2 MSCHAP 3 MSCHAPv2 Yes PAP MSCHAPv2 0 OFF N O ii 0 specified value of the module JP 1 US Canada Europe Us Malaysia Singapore Korea China Japan o8 e C Qo T D x ep CO P D x O o D Q t O A lt gt D 303 8 Appendix RoamingThreshold TORE SHO TORTOAMING 6449206 dBri Yes condition AssociationThreshold Threshold for association 44 t0 35 dBm process ReamingScanWaitTime he time from scanend 2 _ 390 sec Yes 300 to scan start ARP packet send WLANPeriodicArpInterva Intervals for monitoring 3000 60000 ms Yes 3000 the connection status w
58. ONLINE FEED YES Feed the media in online mode at power on NO Do not feed the media in online mode at power on FEED ON ERROR Set the online feed function This function enables the printer to feed media automatically when recovering from a head open error or when starting up the printer and FEED ON ERROR changing to online mode e YES Feed the media when changing to online mode NO Do not feed the media when changing to online mode FUNCTION KEY Allocate the following functions to the D FUNCTION button NONE Do not allocate any function REPRINT Allocate the reprint function Note The FUNCTION button is disabled when NONE is set REPRINT W FEED Enable or disable the reprint function using the FEED button If this function is enabled you can reprint the last print job by pressing the t REPRINT W FEED L FEED button in online mode e YES Enable the reprint function YES NO e NO Disable the reprint function 4 k 128 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration CALENDAR REPRINT Perform the calendar reprint setting e YES The updated calendar data date and time according to the RTC CALENDAR REPRINT Real Time Clock is included in the reprint data NO Print exactly the same data as before YES NO 4 F Note Shows only if EXTERNAL REPRINT is set to ENABLE REPRINT W FEED is set to YES FUNCTION KEY is set to REPRINT or CONTINUOUS PRINT is set to ENABL
59. Printed 1 piece l i Print E i Print End PREND y C e o Q Z LU Y QO T1 lt 150 ns Hise or fall time T1 of PREND signal is less than 150 ns You have to consider the time when outputting the signal from the connected devices When the print start signal and reprint signal are output simultaneously the print start signal is enabled and the printer does not perform reprinting The reprint signal is valid only from the time of the print operation end QTY 0 until the next print data reception Other than that the printer does not perform reprinting 584 ex 886 ex Operator Manual 371 8 Appendix Timing Chart of the EXT Output Signal Output Waveform Printed 1 piece Print Print End S PREND TYPE 1 D me TYPE 2 L o oo TYPE 3 O TYPE 4 on v l en EEEESILLLLLVEGGLOL EC ULLL LLALCLPILALAGGLGLLLL CLO KLLLLLLLLLL CGO ST Paper End Ribbon End Machine Error Print Print End PREND TYPE 1 TYPE2 Paper End Paper End Ribbon End Machine Error Print Print End PREND TYPE 1 TYPE2 Ribbon End Paper End Ribbon End Machine Error 3 2 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Machine Error Ribbon Near End 8 Appendix Output Waveform Head Open Head Close Print Print End TYPE 1 SE TYPE 2 Paper End Ribbon End Machine Error Ribbon Near End Head Open Y Paper End Ribbon Near End 584 ex 5
60. START INPUT SIGNAL REPRINT INPUT SIGNAL LABEL NEAR INPUT SIGNAL FEED OUTPUT SIGNAL PAPER END OUTPUT SIGNAL RIBBON END OUTPUT SIGNAL MACHINE ERR OUTPUT SIGNAL PRINT END OUTPUT SIGNAL ONLINE OUTPUT SIGNAL RIBBON NEAR ZERO SLASH AUTO ONLINE DISPENSER BEFORE TRANSFER ENABLE GAP DISABLE DISABLE NORMAL ALL b00001 1 999999 ENABLE TYPE4 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE Z0PIN OPIN TPIN 21PIN 17PIN 16PIN APIN OPIN BPIN 18PIN YES YES 4 Operation and Configuration Display Status PRINT OFFSET V 0000 Information External signal Status PRINT OFFSET H 0000 Sensor level HEAD DOT DENSITY 300 Printer Configuration CALENDER YEAR 12 Adjustment mode User mode gn 03 Interface mode Interface mode SNMP DAY 10 WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate ji OUR 20 Memory mode MIN Service mode Penne suite CALENDER DAY OF WEEK CODE SUNDAY mode Emulation mode CALENDER DAY OF WEEK CODE MONDAY System Others Restart Printer CALENDER DAY OF WEEK CODE TUESDAY CALENDER DAY OF WEEK CODE WEDNESDAY CALENDER DAY OF WEEK CODE THURSDAY ce e CALENDER DAY OF WEEK CODE FRIDAY CALENDER DAY OF WEEK CODE SATURDAY CALENDER MONTH CODE JANUARY CALENDER MONTH CODE FEBRUARY CALENDER MONTH CODE MARCH CALENDER MONTH CODE APRIL CALENDER MONTH CODE MAY CALENDER MONTH CODE JUNE CALENDER MONTH CODE JULY CALENDER MONTH CODE AUGUST CAI ENDER MONTH CODE SEPTEMBER CALENDER MONTH CODE OCTOBER
61. TA Tm ae 69 9 AD e CALENDER MONTH CODE NOVEMBER CALENDER MONTH CODE DECEMBER M CALENDER CASE FORMAT MIXED CALENDER CHECK DISABLE L S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 213 4 Operation and Configuration CHARACTER PITCH PROPOTIONAL PROTOCOL CODE STANDARD RIBBON SAVER DISABLE MODE SELECT SBPL JOB MODIFICATION DISABLE ROTATE LABEL 0 LABEL SIZE ADJ WIDTH LABEL SIZE ADJ HEIGHT IGNORE A1 LCD POWER SAVING LED INDICATION ERROR INDICATION Submit 214 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 13 RFID Mode Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the RFID mode page is shown as follows Refer to Section 2 1 4 RFID Mode of the S84 ex S86 ex service manual Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XX XXO0OCXXOOCXX NAVAL Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status EEIOHDUR Information RFID LABEL DATA RETRY Y External signal Status Sensor havi MAX ERR COUNT 1 Printer Configuration UE Adjustment mode RFID ERR SLASH YES Y dio aedi RFID ERR OUTPUT LEVEL z Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting LENGTH OF PULSE 100 Y sc ini diei Si RFID TAG OFFSET 0 Memory mode Service mode 0 240 Advanced mode REID mode WRITE POWER 10 0 Emulation mode 0 0 24 0 System Oth Restart Printer READ POWER 10 0 0 0 24 0 LOG DISABLE Y LOG DAT
62. YYYYMMDD e ci NULL Login password of the 16 half width DoDIDQSSNOId TELNET root user E characters EN i KeepAliveTime AENA OT TEE G egg eee Yes 180 KeepAlive packet Retry number of dd 0 DISABLE FtpClientEnableService FTP client setting 1 ENABLE E DISABLE FtpClientLoginUser FTP client user name 1 32 characters Yes so 0 FtpClientLoginPassword FTP client password 1 32 characters FtpServerlPAddress FTP server IP address 0 0 0 0 FtpServerURL FTP server URL 0 48 characters ftp sato co jp FtpServerPort FTP port number 1 65535 EX FtpConnectRetryPeriod Reconnection interval 1 100 0 no retry Reconnection number of 1 10 FtpConnectRetry Times retry 255 keep retrying until connected FipdobTimeout jJob timeout timeout 0 600 0 600 sec 2 Ll S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 305 8 Appendix 8 2 Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions The media sensor positions and the media stop position are as follows S84 ex S86 ex Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Left Hand printer Media stop position in dispense mode 15 mm 0 6 Media feed direction 129 mm 123 mm 5 1 4 8 S84 ex E Gap sensor P eomm Edu 0 2 2 6 vis S86 ex 585 7 qoa lt gt mark sensor we eee 5 mm 0 2 Frame 306 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 84 ex S86 ex Americas Opposite Left Hand Europe Asia Right Hand printer
63. already loaded turn the head lock lever counterclockwise to lock the print head If the media is not loaded continue with Section 3 5 Loading Media 9 Close the top cover 40 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 3 3 Removing the Ribbon 1 Open the top cover 2 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head 3 Pull to remove the used ribbon from the ee ribbon rewind spindle 4 Pull to remove the empty core from the ribbon supply spindle You can use this empty core again when you load a new ribbon roll Load this empty core onto the ribbon rewind spindle 584 ex 8S86 ex Operator Manual 41 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 34 Usable Media This printer can print on two types of media media roll and fan fold media The printer uses media sensors to detect marks or Gaps on the media in order to precisely print the content 1 5 mm 0 067 1 5 mm 0 067 3 mm 0 12 f 14 mm 0 557 I mark label Gap label I mark journal paper linerless label 3 4 1 Adjusting the Position of the Media Sensor Media feed direction Media feed direction Media feed direction Non standard media are media with printing on the reverse side or media with special shapes When using non standard media make sure that the media sensor position is aligned with the I mark or gap of the media The I mark sensor of the printer has a fixed position of 5 mm 0 2 measured
64. and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 5 2 Adjusting the I mark Sensor Level Manually The adjustment procedure for the l mark sensor level is as follows 1 Go to the SENSOR LEVEL setting screen of SERVICE MODE Perform steps 1 through 4 of Section 6 5 1 Adjusting the Media Sensor Automatically 2 Select MANUAL using the A buttons and then press the ENTER button SENSOR LEVEL The light emission level adjustment of the l mark sensor is shown AUTO MANUAL 3 On the SENSOR LEVEL I MARK E screen press the A Y buttons to set SENSOR LEVEL ADJUST LEVEL to 2 and then press the MARK E X XV ENTER b utton ADJUST LEVEL The adjustment range of ADJUST LEVEL is from 0 ES to 3 We recommend using the initial value which is 2 The light reception level adjustment of the I mark sensor is shown First adjust the Low reception level voltage of the I mark sensor 4 Open the top cover and unlock the media feed and media sensor assembly 5 Physically place the media with the portion without the I mark resting over the l mark sensor 6 Press the media feed and media sensor assembly down to lock tt To get the correct adjustment result close the media sensor assembly before performing the adjustment 258 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual T Press the A Y buttons to change ADJUST LEVEL until the I MARK R value is 1 0 V or lower The adjustment range of ADJUST LEVEL is from 0 to 127 Note The A
65. be initialized to the shipping state DEFAULT ALT PROTOCOL Select whether or not to initialize the protocol code e YES Initialize the protocol code DEFAULT e NO Cancel and return to the DEFAULT MODE screen ALT PROTOCOL YES W Note Shows only if DEFAULT MODE is set to ALT PROTOCOL DEFAULT WLAN SETTING Select whether or not to initialize the WLAN setting YES Initialize the WLAN setting DEFAULT e NO Cancel and return to the DEFAULT MODE screen WLAN SETTING NO Note 4o Shows only if DEFAULT MODE is set to WLAN SETTING 182 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration DEFAULT SETTING COMPLETED Shows when the initialization has been completed DEFAULT SETTING COMPLETED Note PLEASE POWER OFF The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 183 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 19 Download Mode This download feature allows the operator to download data firmware font logo TrueType font configuration from the host computer through the interface SD card or USB memory and write in the Flash ROM memory When downloading is complete the LCD screen will return to the original screen after three seconds If an error occurs an error message will show and the reason will be identified The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the download mode The table describes each setting screen in detail N CAU
66. but the wireless LAN adapter is connected the configured interface setting is changed from USB to WLAN S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 31 2 Installing the Printer 26 Connecting the Power Cord N WARNING e Do not touch the power switch connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands are wet Doing so could cause an electric shock e Always connect the ground wire to a ground terminal Electric shock could occur if you do not Note e The attached power cord is designed exclusively for this printer Do not use the attached power cord with other devices 1 Connect the power cord to the AC input terminal at the rear of the printer Take note of the orientation of the connector Secure the printer with one hand and insert the connector tightly 2 Insert the power plug into an AC outlet Make sure that the AC voltage of your region is in the range of AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz If your local voltage is not in the stated range contact your SATO reseller or technical support center The shape of the power plug varies depending on the region in which it was purchased Note This product is also designed for IT power distribution system with phase to phase voltage 230 V 32 S 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 2 Installing the Printer 2 Power On Off the Printer N WARNING Do not touch the power switch connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands are wet Doing so could cause an electric
67. button DES AES 4 button H X button PRIVACY KEY 4 button USER MIB WRITE ENABLE MENS 4 F lt button 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 79 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen l K 4 button Pressing the 5 button on each screen will revert to the X button INTERFACE MODE menu TRAP DISABLE NTERFACE MODE 4 button ai id I ENABLE MINMJRS 4 F 9i 5 ENABLE 4 button l l l ee ee east ola eae eee oe eee Boe l l 1 X button 1 Shows only when 1 USER NAME Shows only when TRAP TYPE SELECT TRAP TYPE SELECT i is set to i is set to SNMPv3 l SNMPv1 SNMPv2c l ai l I 1 1 4 button A I X button NOM ME dd ne LM l AUTH PROTOCOL 1 NONE X button NONE A button U eNMDouAS A aaa oOo MD5 SNMPv3 X button A MD5 SHA 1 I l AUTH KEY E ask X button 4 button 1 4 button X button 4 button DES AES l l l l l l PRIVACY PROTOCOL NONE l l A button l l Pv4 6 select IPv6 4 button IPv4 IPv6 X button TRAP IPv4 ADR TRAP IPv6 ADR d 000 0000 0000 00 000 000 000 0000 0000 0000 a 0000 0000 T 4 button 4 button 80 S84 ex 8
68. completing the print of media 1 Paper end error will occur After releasing the error media 1 will not be printed again 584 ex 886 ex Operator Manual 327 8 Appendix When the media pitch size is between the print head position and the I mark sensor and is more than 15 mm 0 6 Media feed direction Paper end error will occur while printing the media 1 right after detecting paper end e f an error occurs while printing media 1 will be printed again after releasing the error If the print job is completed at the time an error occurs media 1 will not be printed again 328 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 8 3 Sensor Error Detection of a sensor error is performed by the gap sensor or the mark sensor when the pitch sensor is enabled and the detection distance of the sensor error varies depending on the condition such as the type of sensor Detection method for each sensor type Gap Sensor When using the Gap sensor Detection of sensor error Setting value of sensor error detection distance Slips leya ieiuna euntem a me see tuse eed I mark Sensor When using the I mark sensor Detection of sensor error lt gt Setting value of sensor error detection distance Slice level Distance to detect the sensor error Detection distance of sensor error is determined by the head density and the vertical print area In addition it varies b
69. down the PII LINE and FEED buttons for five seconds Read the caution note below before you proceed with this operation N CAUTION Although restricting the head check type to BARCODE allows you to continue printing or forcing the printer to resume printing you should only do so in order to complete an urgent print job Check the printed media to make sure the output is usable in spite of the head error As soon as possible stop using the print head to prevent further damage If necessary replace the print head 280 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 When a Warning Message Occurs When a warning message is shown on the screen the printer continues issuing media The warning message its cause and the countermeasures are as follows No Message LED Buzzer Cause _ Countermeasure Label near end QTY 000000 Receive buffer nearly full QTY 000000 Head error QTY 000000 Lights blue No beep To clear the error Open and close the print head Lights blue No beep To clear the error Open and close the print head Lights blue No beep Lights blue One short beep To clear the error The icon will be cleared by receiving the next item or canceling the job Lights blue No beep The remaining amount of media is not enough The remaining amount of ribbon is not enough Available space for receive buffer is low Command error has been detected
70. ex 203dpi HEAD SELECT KPJ 168 85A08 Sim EP m S86 ex 305dpi HEAD SELECT KPJ 168 125A08 KPJ 168 121TA08 M SAVE USER DEF YES wW DEFAULT SETTING COMPLETED PLEASE POWER OFF S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 141 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 13 Advanced Mode The advanced mode lets you configure the more advanced features of the printer hardware The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the advanced mode The table describes each setting screen in detail ADVANCED MODE uL es 4 button Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the ADVANCED MODE menu Shows only when the PASSWORD input is enabled 4 button l o oo m eee Se ms f PRINTER TYPE DISPENSER DISPENSER 4 CONTINUOUS 4 button X button CONTINUOUS or LINERLESS BACKFEED MOTION AFTER BEFORE 4 button 1 I I i X button PRINT METHOD TRANSFER lt button CONTINUOUS DIRECT a T X button DISPENSER PITCH SENSOR ENABLE 4 SENSOR TYPE 4 button DISPENSER 4 button LINERLESS DISABLE meme DISABLE lg_ _________________ _ 4 X button CONTINUOUS LINERLESS CONTINUOUS l r l
71. format again after reboot ENABLE Save the user format data registered at printing in the printer 0 SLASH Set whether to print the number zero 0 with or without a slash The options are as follows e OFF Print zero without a slash ON Print zero with a slash FONT c20 PITCH FORMAT STORE Dee ENABLE 4 F oet whether to print each character using a fixed pitch or proportional pitch spacing The options are as follows FIXED Print all characters with the fixed pitch PROP Print each character with proportional pitch spacing CODEPAGE Select the code page to be used from the list The options are as follows 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 850 1250 1251 240 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual FONI c20 PITCH FIXED PROP 4 F CODEPAGE 1252 1253 850 1250 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 1 Maintenance A dirty print head or platen roller not only affects the print quality but also causes errors Use a cleaning kit or cleaning sheet to clean the printer regularly N CAUTION Do not touch the power switch connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands are wet Doing so could cause an electric shock Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you begin cleaning The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Wait until the printer cools down Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injur
72. from the printer s center frame The position of the gap sensor is adjustable You can adjust the gap sensor position in the following range S84 ex printer 5 mm to 66 mm 0 2 to 2 6 measured from the printer s center frame S86 ex printer 5 mm to 81 mm 0 2 to 3 2 measured from the printer s center frame 1 Open the top cover 2 Turn the media sensor adjustment knob 0 clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the gap sensor position The green indicator C on top of the media sensor assembly shows the position of the gap sensor 42 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 3 5 Loading Media Use genuine media and ribbons for the printer for optimum print quality N CAUTION e The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury 3 5 1 Loading Label with Dispenser This section describes the procedure to dispense the label and eject the liner out of the printer The routing path of the label is shown below When loading the media make sure that the print side is facing up Label Liner Feed roller and media sensor assembly i ressure Media shaft roller V N Label Media shaft 7 1 Open the top cover N CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 43
73. has already been taken 7 Troubleshooting 7 1 2 More Information about Head Check Function The head check function detects the integrity of the heating elements in the print head However malfunctions cannot be detected instantaneously a few printed media may start showing printing defects before the printer warns of a print head error After detection of a print head error use a scanner to check all affected media A5 i HEAD ERROR Press the I LINE FEED buttons for five seconds Press the it FEED button for five seconds HEAD CHECK NORMAL BARCODE 4 ENTER button Disable the head check function HEAD CHECK temporarily until the printer is turned off NORMAL Actual printed area BARCODE Barcode printed area Head Check OK OK ES A OFFLINE QTY 000000 When a print head error occurs during normal printing barcodes text and graphics 1 Press and hold down the FEED button for five seconds HEAD CHECK setting screen shows 2 Select BARCODE using the A buttons and then press the ENTER button 3 see if printing can be resumed normally If printing resumes the print head fault does not fall on the barcode area for the current print job As such printing may be continued but with degraded print quality and readable barcodes If the head check error still occurs and the current print job has to be completed printing can be forced to resume by holding
74. host computer or other connected devices and start the print job Adjust the buzzer volume NAV KS SSS Y 45 2N I Cv Changes to settings mode Shows the remaining X Enters offline mode Adjust the Press simultaneously for one print job and the print job is display second to enter adjustment stopped brightness mode When you send a pause command during printing the printer stops the print job and enters pause mode NAV KS Shows the remaining print job Resume the print job In offline mode you can cancel the print job feed the media or enter the setting mode menu e Adjust the buzzer volume Press for more WAT than five seconds to FUNCTION enter the simple FH p standalone OFFLINE hun mode QI Y 000005 Cv ZA Enters the setting mode menu a Cancel the print job Shows the remaining Enters online Feeda Adjust the Press simultaneously print job mode or pause pieceof display for one second to enter mode media brightness adjustment mode D8 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 2 Adjusting the Display Brightness In normal mode online or offline press the lt buttons repeatedly to adjust the display brightness ONLINE QTY 000000 You can adjust the brightness in thirty two steps sixteen left and sixteen right The brightness changes one step for every press of the button or gt button 4 2 3 Adjusting
75. l l e e mo e Rm m m m m m m m m m e m m co e m e m e m X button Select ENABLE COMPATIBLE MODE 3 button PRINTER MODEL DARKNESS M8485 90 60 65S nee e SMS DISABLE X button RREN 4 F T Select DISABLE 4 button X button 4 button MEDIA LENGTH E500 mm Az 4 button X button S B S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 125 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or Y button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the SERVICE MODE setting screen 4 button X button SAVE PRINT LOG ENABLE MINJRS 4 F 4 button J X button MEMORY SELECT Shows only when SAVE PRINT LOG is set to ENABLE SD CARD USB MEMORY lt button X button CLEAR PRINT LOG 4 button X button i OUTPUT PRINT LOG FROM SUBPORT ENABLE YASS is 4 F 4 button ee ee eee ee X button RIBBON TENSION Shows only for the thermal transfer ADJUSTMENT model l 4 button ee Ger eee ead Get dec hee cee cee See cess eed X button THROUGHPUT FAST Iia 4 F i 4 button pms J e eee eee ee ee ee eee lee eS lc X button Shows only if PRINTER TYPE is set FEED OFFSET to LINERLESS Oa mm 4 button X button BACKFEED
76. mode Refer to Section 4 2 11 Memory Mode for details 1 Power off the printer 2 Insert the optional SD card into the SD card slot with the orientation the same as shown in the picture Contact your SATO reseller for the recommended SD card 3 To seat the SD card in the SD card slot push it in until it makes a slight clicking sound and is almost completely inside the printer When seated and ready to operate only a very small portion protrudes approximately 3 18 mm 0 125 34 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 2 Installing the Printer 2 8 2 Removing the Optional SD Card 1 Power off the printer 2 Press the card edge slightly to release the SD card from the SD card slot The SD card slot will immediately release the SD card N CAUTION Do not remove the SD card while the printer is accessing the data in the SD card Doing so may result in data corruption 2 8 3 Installing the Optional USB Memory When using the USB memory for the first time format the USB memory in the memory card mode Refer to Section 4 2 11 Memory Mode for details 1 Power off the printer 2 Open the top cover 3 Insert the optional USB memory into the USB connector Series A plug 2 0 High speed on the front of the printer Contact your SATO reseller for the recommended USB memory 4 Close the top cover To remove the USB memory from the printer Power off the printer before removing the USB memory N
77. mode Shows only if you have installed the optional RFID kit and enabled the RFID mode 1 Information mode Access the information of this printer Select the setting mode according to the following procedure 1 Press the Pll LINE button to change the printer to offline mode zit The printer changes to offline mode OFFLINE QTY 000000 2 Press the ENTER button The printer changes to the setting mode menu ONLINE MODE 3 Select the setting mode using the ub F i A V lt 4 gt buttons oT i RFID A The selected setting mode shows on the screen and the icon is highlighted by inverting its colors 4 Press the ENTER button to enter the selected mode S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 69 4 Operation and Configuration The functions of the buttons in the setting mode menu are shown as below Enters offline USER MODE F0 1G mode Enters the selected setting X mode CANCEL S MAD Enters offline mode Selected Selected icon Valid arrow buttons Navigate to setting highlighted for selection select the mode with inverted setting mode colors 70 S84 ex 886 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 9 User Mode The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the user mode The table describes each setting screen in detail um e m e um e m e m m m p m e m e m e m Shows only when the Shows only w
78. ne doit pas produire de brouillage e L utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d exposition aux rayonnements nonc es pour un environnement non contr l et respecte les r gles d exposition aux fr quences radio lectriques RF CNR 102 de l IC Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps l exception des extr mit s mains poignets pieds et chevilles Disposal of Old Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems A product marked with this symbol on itself or on its packaging shall not be treated as household waste Instead it shall be handed over to an appropriate collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment in accordance with local regulations Inappropriate waste handling of this product may cause detrimental consequences for the environment and damage to human health The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources and contribute to your community For more detailed E information on recycling of this product contact your local municipal organization your household waste disposal service or the dealer where you purchased the product EN550
79. of the ribbon fold Typically this is the result of the axis of the ribbon spindle print head and the ribbon adjustment plate not being perfectly parallel Required tool Phillips screwdriver The adjustment procedure for the ribbon tension is as follows 1 Open the top cover of the printer 2 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head 3 Locate two screws from the front of the print head assembly iin 4 Loosen two screws attached to the ribbon adjustment plate Do not remove the screws 5 Adjust the ribbon adjustment plate as shown below e Adjust the left side of the plate upward when a wrinkle occurs on the right e Adjust the right side of the plate upward when a wrinkle occurs on the left 6 Hold the ribbon adjustment plate in the set position and tighten two screws T Perform a test print to check the printing quality The ribbon must not be wrinkled or meander 8 Hepeat the procedure from steps 1 through 6 until the ribbon tension is even on both sides S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 269 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 9 Adjusting the Media Feed Roller Balance If the media is inclined to meander at the media feed in to one side media feed roller balance adjustment may be required This media feed roller is spring loaded on each end and embedded in the media sensor assembly By adjusting the screw on either end downward the pressure on that end is increase
80. power cord 14 pin conversion cable Quick guide Warranty etc Hibbon core I The shape of power plug varies depending on the region in which it was purchased Note Keep the packaging box and cushioning material after installing the printer You can pack the printer with this packaging box for shipment when requesting for repairs 28 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 2 Installing the Printer 25 Connecting the Interface Cable The connection of the interface cable is explained as follows 2 5 1 Available Interfaces This printer supports the following interfaces Furthermore a printer connected with multiple interface cables can continue to operate when receiving data You cannot receive data from more than one interface at a time You cannot use the USB interface if you have installed the optional wireless LAN e USB e LAN e RS 232C e EEE1284 e Bluetooth e Wireless LAN WLAN e External signal EXT Note The wireless LAN interface and Bluetooth interface are optional 2 5 2 Interface Connections Host computer 10101 B E ote Applicator 1 Make sure that the printer host computer and applicator are powered off Set the power switch of the printer to the O position 2 Connect the printer to a host computer with one or more of the available interface connections Use a cable that is compatible with the standard of the interface board as stated in Section 8 13 Interface S
81. pressing the Il LINE button when the LCD backlight is off in online mode S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 313 8 Appendix 8 5 Input Output Signal of the External Signal This section provides additional information about setting the pin number of the input output signal in the INPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SIGNAL screen of the advanced mode menu Setting Conditions Pin No Mid ud Name Input Output E Value Mid ad Nl e NE Available Pin No FED Not Allowed Allowed 21 7 Note When is selected the MACHINE ERR Allowed 4 5 6 16 17 18 Note When is selected there is PRINT END 1 Not Allowed no output You cannot select for the PRINT END output signal Note e When multiple errors are allocated to one pin the signal is output when one of the errors occurs All errors need to be released in order to switch the signal output back to normal 314 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix When the PIN number is overlapped in the Input Output signal setting l Return to the display where l the PIN number is overlapped Set the PIN number again OUTPUT SIGNAL MACHINE ERR Pin PRINT END BPin l ONLINE fPin l RIBBON NEAR iEPin button UPDATED SETTING PLEASE POWER OFF Power off and then power on the printer again l 1 1 l 1 1 l 1 1 l 1 1 J X button 4 button PIN number is overlapped 1 0 SIGNAL
82. printer reads and shows the data NO Do not read the data and proceed to the next screen VIEW PC DATA 1 0 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual TAG DATA This screen shows the data of the RFID tag If the read code is more than thirty two digits scroll using the A V buttons to show the data If reading of the data is failed NO TAG FOUND is shown RETRY Read the data again CONTINUE Proceed to the next screen ANTENNA PITCH oet the antenna pitch e STANDARD e SHORT RFID TAG OFFSET Set the value of the tag offset If the value is set to other than 0 tag writing is done during pause in printing The setting range is from 0 to 240 mm To release this function set the value to 0 mm WRITE POWER Set the write power of the antenna referring to the S84 ex UHF Inlay Placement amp Configuration Table in the S84 ex UHF RFID Configuration Guide The measurement unit is in dBm and it is adjustable with 0 1 dBm The value converted to milliwatts mW is shown on the left The setting range differs according to the mounted RFID module The setting range is from 0 0 to 24 0 dBm 4 Operation and Configuration 0123456 89ABCDEF 01234567 RETRY MUS 4 F NO TAG FOUND RETRY KONEN 4 F ANTENNA PITCH SEMI SHORT 4 F RFID TAG OFFSET On oh m WRITE POWER 10mW dBm S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 171 4 Operation and Configuration READ POWER set the read power of the antenna r
83. ribbon sensor will detect the ribbon end error Following are the behaviors when detecting the ribbon end according to the remaining print job e When the remaining printing is 12 mm or more the printer generates a ribbon error immediately after detection e When the remaining printing is less than 12 mm the printer generates a ribbon error after printing is completed Ribbon near end detection The ribbon near end is detected by the ribbon sensor on the supply side This occurs when the remaining ribbon length becomes less than approximately 15 m 49 2 ft ribbon diameter is approximately 36 mm 1 4 Note that the remaining ribbon length 15 m 49 2 ft is a calculated value from the revolution speed of the ribbon on the supply side The timing of the ribbon end varies according to the reading condition of the ribbon sensor and the ribbon thickness 330 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 0 9 Print Speed and Media Size The minimum media pitch size varies by the print speed setting Continuous mode Dispenser mode Print speed Minimum media pitch Thermal transfer Direct thermal inches sec size mm Minimum media pitch Minimum media pitch size mm size mm Note If using media smaller than the minimum size the media will not stop at the right position causing a print misalignment Do not send the print data with media size that is smaller than the minimum media pitch size even when the sensor is disa
84. select a value V9 MIN The setting range is from 00 to 15 MIN When 00 is selected this function is disabled and the LCD backlight is always on 5 Press the ENTER button to save the setting Conditions to set the LCD backlight to off Under the following conditions the LCD backlight lights off when the time specified on the LCD POWER SAVING setting screen has elapsed With this function only the LCD backlight lights off and the on screen message remains the same e The printer has not received the print data ESC A to ESC Z in various interfaces Each protocol s status return request cancel request and incorrect data are omitted No button is pressed The printer is not in error mode he printer is neither printing nor feeding media he printer is in online mode offline mode or hex dump mode This function is disabled in download mode Conditions to set the LCD backlight to on Any of the following conditions will light the LCD backlight on again e he printer receives the print data from various interfaces Each protocol s status return request cancel request and incorrect data are omitted e Any button on the operator panel is pressed Printer error such as Head open occurs e he printer starts the printing operation Pressing any button while the LCD backlight is off will only light the LCD backlight back on The function of the button is invalid For example the printer does not go offline by
85. seo eei up deti deas Deo uacua a Veo Ue rat apri ienaa 320 8 7 3 Replacing the Pressure Roller sees 322 8 7 4 Replacing the Media Feed Roller cccccssececcssseeceececseeececseeseeseuseesseseeesseeeeess 324 o Lo xi eiztesrebi u Fan ge Rr a 325 8 8 Media Motion of the Printer Operation 326 8 8 1 Ted lene UL T E 326 9 02 AO i EP usos disi Cual aunt haaxalonauinnd E a dened Mna ER rin Ud 326 sEsKchwur 616516 ig ml 0 enero er 329 8 S TAO ON Eie f10 ERR I REED cm 330 8 9 Print Speed and Media SIZG oie uox Ecce x aae co opina eaa pt ee 9i ex aca Io eere o E Ea etes sus 331 8 10 Optional Ribbon SaV6L 2 1 rco oce reco nita onere coco E RE EH oo ne a cuo rue o ee o cO aa vd we Cuas iue 332 8 10 1 Ribbori Saver ODOratiODus i ies easet Laetare Debt utet a a T a 332 8 10 2 Ribbon Saver Timing Charts iie eroe dabei e rete et ete p E 333 8 10 3 Ribbon Saver Operation and Ribbon Consumption essssessusss 334 8 10 4 Ribbon Specification for the Ribbon Saver seeeeeeseeeeeennn 337 8 10 5 Label Specification for the Ribbon Saver seeeeeseseeeeeeeeeenrne 337 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Table of Contents 8 11 Optional UHF RFID Configuration eee esee 338 ode e P conie lite Pim PME to ETOS Mae rc 340 8 11 2 RFID
86. shock N CAUTION Do not power off the printer during operation such as when printing or updating Doing so could cause a malfunction of the printer 2 1 Power On the Printer 1 Press the power switch on the operator panel to I position 2 ONLINE shows on the screen and the LED lights blue 2 2 Power Off the Printer 1 Make sure that the printer is in offline mode before you power off If ONLINE shows on the screen press the gt Il LINE button to change to offline mode 2 Press the power switch on the operator panel to O position Lr ia ONLINE QTY 000000 OFFLINE QTY 000000 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 33 2 Installing the Printer 28 Installing Optional Memory Storage The optional SD card or USB memory can be used for uploading and downloading data print format graphics extended characters registered in the printer and printer firmware Contact your SATO reseller or service center for the recommended SD card or USB memory N CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card 2 8 1 Installing the Optional SD Card You can install an optional SD card into the SD card slot located on the rear of the printer When using the SD card for the first time format the SD card in the memory card
87. shown on the screen Shows only when the 3 l SorxX PASSWORD input is enabled E button _ L d tee eee debuton ee ee ee ee ed ha x SELECT DUMP DATA utton 0a an RECEIVE BUFFER or RECEIVE BUFFER INTERNAL DATA or SEND BACK DATA 4 button cane EDAM button SAVE PRINT SAVE zlkdpcd CS 4 button 4o X button X button i 4 button I HEX DUMP NORMAL HALF 4 F 5 button s 4 button gt Il button ONLINE ONLINE QTY 000000 QTY 000000 Data reception Data reception Normal print Hex dump print Print data save D E icon is shown when RECEIVE OFFLINE DATA is selected QTY 000000 TOTT DTT DTT TTT TTT OTT TTT TTT TTT TO TT T77 MM MEE T77 T77 TTT IE TTA TTT EM wc TT S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration HEX DUMP MODE 26 aC T et E ie 1 a i Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value gt accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen RECEIVE BUFFER SEND BACK DATA lt button 4 button INTERNAL DATA X button A button X button 1 button HEX DUMP SEND BACK DATA Bo See SAVE TRANSMITTING 4 F SAVE X button 4 button tease MUS SEND BACK DATA NORMAL HALF COMPLETED f I I i I i i I i I I I i I i HEX DUMP l gt
88. signal EXT function e ENABLE Enable the external signal EXT function DISABLE Disable the external signal EXT function Note Shows only if PRINTER TYPE is set to CONTINUOUS 4 Operation and Configuration HEAD CHECK MODE CHECK PAGE 000008 Ax EXTERNAL SIGNAL SETTING EXTERNAL SIGNAL mE DISABLE 4 F S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 149 4 Operation and Configuration EXTERNAL SIGNAL oet the output signal type of the print end signal PREND The following options are available EXTERNAL SIGNAL TYPE TYPE TYPE1 The print end signal PREND is High before label TYPES Mac iT printing and it becomes Low after print completion The signal level becomes High after 20 ms TYPE2 The print end signal PREND is Low before label printing and it becomes High after print completion The signal level becomes Low after 20 ms TYPES3 The print end signal PREND is High before label printing becomes Low from the start to the end of print and becomes High again after print completion TYPEA The print end signal PREND is Low before label printing becomes High from the start to the end of print and becomes Low again after print completion Note e Shows only if the external signal EXT function is enabled Refer to the Timing Chart of the EXT Input Signal for details EXTERNAL REPRINT Set the reprint function by reprint signal from the external signal e ENABLE Enable the reprint EXTER
89. specify the distance of FEED OFFSET and BACKFEED OFFSET in the SERVICE MODE menu BACKFEED MOTION Backfeed is applicable only if the print mode is set to dispenser mode AFTER Backfeed the front part of the next label after dispensing the BACKFEED MOTION label BEFORE Before printing backfeed the front part of the media to the AFTER print head position BEFORE PRINT METHOD Set the print method TRANSFER Print using a ribbon PRINT METHOD DIRECT Print using direct thermal paper TRANSFER DIRECT PITCH SENSOR Enable or disable the pitch sensor ENABLE Enable the pitch sensor PITCH SENSOR DISABLE Disable the pitch sensor aes DISABLE Note 4o Shows only if PRINTER TYPE is set to CONTINUOUS S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 147 4 Operation and Configuration SENSOR TYPE Set the type of sensor for sensing the media MARK Use the reflective type sensor GAP Use the transmissive type sensor SENSOR TYPE MARK GAP COMMAND ERROR Enable or disable the command error indication This setting determines the printer motion when detecting a command error ENABLE Stops printing when a command error occurs e DISABLE Shows a warning icon and continues printing when a command error occurs COMMAND ERROR ENABLE MESSRS 4 F HEAD CHECK This printer can be set to check the print head when printing each media e ENABLE Enable the head check function e DISABLE Di
90. that the cable is not damaged If you are using a Windows printer driver check that the correct port is selected 4 Check the configuration of the printer aA the a RH of the IEEE1284 interface through the INTERFACE MODE menu 5 Connect to another Connecttoanotherport 0000 a Power on the printer again 7 5 6 External Signal Interface EXT Check that the printer and external device are connected with a cable correctly Check that the cable is not damaged Check the configuration of the printer he the TTC Teram era UP RE of the RS 232C interface through the INTERFACE MODE menu 2 Check that the cable is not damaged 0000000 Check that the power of the external device is on 4 Check the configuration of the printer Check the setting of the external signal EXT interface Power on the printer and external device again S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 289 7 Troubleshooting 7 5 7 Wireless LAN Interface Optional Check that the wireless LAN function is on 2 Check that the devices using the same frequency band such as wireless LAN enabled devices or microwaves are not in use Check that there is no obstacle such as a metal rack between the printer and the host 4 Check the configuration of the printer Check the setting of the wireless LAN interface through the INTERFACE MODE menu 5 jPoweonthepineragin 0000 Power on the printer again 290 S84 ex S86 ex Operator
91. the Buzzer Volume In normal mode online or offline press the A button repeatedly to adjust the volume of the buzzer This illustration shows the screen images of the volume adjustment in offline mode Sa OFFLINE QTY 000000 OFFLINE QTY 000000 1 When the printer is in online or offline mode press the A button to show the current buzzer volume of the printer The buzzer volume icon is shown on the top right corner of the screen 2 Pressing the A button will cycle through the volume level and the buzzer will beep according to the volume S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 59 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 4 Canceling the Print Job Cancel the print job according to the following procedure 1 Press the PII LINE button to change the printer to offline mode 2 Press the X CANCEL button CANCEL PRINT JOB shows to confirm the cancelation of the print job 3 Press the lt gt buttons to select YES and press the a ENTER button to confirm CURRENT and ALL show on the screen Note Be sure you want to cancel the print job before selecting YES The job cannot be recovered and it has to be transmitted to the printer again Press the FUNCTION button or X CANCEL button to exit the CANCEL PRINT JOB mode without clearing the print data 4 Press the lt gt buttons to select CURRENT or ALL e CURRENT Cancel the current print job ALL Cancel all the print jobs in printer s memory 5 Pre
92. the value and proceed to the next setting screen Note e When the authentication name is less than 8 characters there will be buzzer sounds and it will not move to the next screen e Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PRIVACY PROTOCOL Select SNMP trap privacy protocol The options are as follows PRIVACY PROTOCOL NONE DES NONE AES DES Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PRIVACY KEY Input SNMP trap privacy key Input more than 8 characters for the authentication name Press the lt P buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to PRIVACY KEY change the value i Press the lt ENTER button to save the value and proceed to the next setting screen Note e When the authentication name is less than 8 characters there will be buzzer sounds and it will not move to the next screen e Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 90 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual TRAP IPv4 ADR oet the IPv4 address where trap is output The setting range is from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Note Shows only if the SNTP function is enabled TRAP IPv6 ADR oet the IPv6 address where tr
93. to change the printer to offline mode 2 Press the ENTER button The printer changes to setting mode menu 3 select the SERVICE MODE using the A lt 4 gt buttons and then press the 4 ENTER button SERVICE MODE setting screen shows vi O ex i s Note If password function is enabled PASSWORD is shown on the screen instead Enter the password to continue 4 select the SENSOR LEVEL using the A1Y buttons and then press the ENTER button SERVICE MODE SENSOR LEVEL shows on the screen SENSOR LEVEL SETTING 5 Select AUTO using the A buttons and then press the ENTER button SENSOR LEVEL SENSOR SELECT shows on the screen AUTO MANUAL S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 255 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 Press the A V buttons to select the type of sensor to be adjusted and then press the 4 ENTER button The instruction of placing the media shows When I MARK is selected When GAP is selected Open the top cover and unlock the media feed and media sensor assembly Place the media liner on the media Sensor To adjust the I mark sensor place the white area of media under the media sensor To adjust the gap sensor peel off the label and place the liner under the media sensor 9 Press the media feed and media sensor assembly down to lock it To get the correct adjustment result perform the adjustment after you have closed the media sensor assembly
94. to the Programming Reference RIBBON SAVER Enable or disable the ribbon saver function ENABLE Use the ribbon saver e DISABLE Do not use the ribbon saver Note Shows only if the optional ribbon saver is installed The optional ribbon saver is only available for the S84 ex printer For details on the ribbon saver function refer to Section 8 10 Optional Ribbon Saver MODE SELECT oet the communication command mode for analysis e XML Use for supporting Oracle and SAP mode e SBPL Use SBPL SATO Barcode Printer Language for the printer commands Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again JOB MODIFICATION Set the job modification function Use the job modification command lt J gt to specify the strings before and after conversion e ENABLE Enable the job modification function DISABLE Disable the job modification function 4 Operation and Configuration PROTOCOL CODE STANDARD NON S T ANDARD RIBBON SAVER ENABLE MESTRE 4 F MODE SELECT XML Seal 4 F JOB MODIFICATION ENABLE DIETSJNE 4 F S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 157 4 Operation and Configuration ROTATE LABEL set the rotation for printing 0 Print the data as usual without rotation ROTATE LABEL 90 Print the data with 90 degree counterclockwise rotation from media feed direction DEG 90 180 270 4 F 180 Print the data with 180 degree counterclockwise rotation from media feed
95. unlock the print head Use a cleaning pen to clean the dirt on the print head G 246 S 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 3 Adjusting the Base Reference Point 6 3 1 About the Base Reference Point The base reference point is the point at which one determines the print position and stop dispensing position The base reference point differs depending on the operation mode or media sensor you use Continuous Mode I mark Label Gap Label lt Print and stop position lt Print and stop position Feed direction Feed direction Dispenser Mode I mark Label Gap Label des lt Print and dispensing position lt Print and dispensing position Feed direction Feed direction S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 247 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 3 2 Adjusting the Print Position Adjustment Location Adjustment Range Adjustment Mode Pitch Position 3 75 mm to 3 75 mm 0 15 to 0 15 Print position is adjustable within the range of 3 75 mm to 3 75 mm 0 15 to 0 15 in the adjustment mode described above The shift experienced by the media ribbon or print layout can be offset with the adjustment of the pitch position Print position Print head Gap sensor V V ry l l Adjustment for value a O No adjustment De e a a e eaaa Adjustment for value 3 75 mm
96. while using the emulation module The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for loading the emulation module The table describes each setting screen in detail MODULE SETTING LOAD DOWNLOAD Select LOAD X button 4 button MODULE LOAD SID FIRMWARE SZPL XX XXX 4 button MODULE SETTING SAVE COMPLETED 3 beeps Printer j reboot Emulation icon shows if emulation module is QTY 000000 loaded MODULE LOAD Select the module to be loaded to the printer using the A V buttons and then press the ENTER button MODULE LOAD STD FIRMWARE Load the standard firmware STD FIRMWARE SZPL XX XXX Load the downloaded SZPL emulation firmware SZPL XX XXX SDPL XX XXX Load the downloaded SDPL emulation firmware SIPL XX XXX Load the downloaded SIPL emulation firmware Note The XX XXX is the module version information 222 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode MODULE SETTING SAVE COMPLETED This screen shows the completion of saving the module setting and three beeps will sound MODULE SETTING SAVE COMPLETED REBOOT PRINTER NOW This screen shows the printer starts rebooting and start up the printer with the selected firmware loaded REBOOT PRINTER NOW S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 223 5 Emulation Mode 5 1 2 Deleting the Emulation Module In the emulation module loader user can delete the downloaded emulation module to free up m
97. 0 250 ogg 0 250 NO ENABLE Uus NORMAL 0000 0 9999 YES YES YES KP I 168 8SAO8 T Please verify via label on print head prior to making any changes to this setting submit Note Reapply the setting data update after the system reboots S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 211 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 12 Advanced Mode Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the Advanced mode page is shown as follows continued to the next two pages Refer to Section 4 2 13 Advanced Mode NAVAS Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status Information External signal Status Sensor level Printer Configuration Adjustment mode User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer 212 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Model 66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XXOOCXXOOCXOXCXX Advanced mode PRINTER TYPE BACKFEED MOTION DISPENSER PRINT METHOD PITCH SENSOR CONTINUOUS SENSOR TYPE DISPENSER COMMAND ERROR HEAD CHECK ENABLE DISABLE HEAD CHECK NORMAL BARCODE HEAD CHECK MODE HEAD CHECK PAGE NO EXTERNAL SIGNAL ENABLE DISABLE EXTERNAL SIGNAL TYPE1 TYPE4 EXTERNAL REPRINT CONTINUOUS PRINT ENHANCED REPRINT INPUT SIGNAL PRINT
98. 000 QTY 000000 PLUG amp PLAY Enable or disable the Plug and play function of the printer ENABLE Enable the Plug and play function PLUG amp PLAY DISABLE Disable the Plug and play function mje DISABLE 4 k Note This function will affect the IEEE1284 interface connectivity because it uses the DEVICE ID response of the IEEE1284 138 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration REGION CODE Set the region code of the wireless LAN The channel range varies depending on the region code as follows REGION CODE Range CANADA USA NM SHIPS SINGAPORE Singapore w REPLY PERIOD Set the LAN reply timing NORMAL Reply intervals of 500 to 1000 milliseconds REPLY PERIOD e FAST Reply intervals of 200 to 400 milliseconds WOUE FAST 4 F ENQ REPLY DELAY TIME Set the ENQ reply delay time The setting range is from 0000 to 9999 ms and is adjustable by 1 ms ENQ REPLY Note DELAY TIME e f 0000ms is selected the printer sends an ENQ response with no 0009 ms delay T e If status 4 is set as the cyclic response mode the printer sends an ENQ response with no delay for cycle response or ENQ command S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 139 4 Operation and Configuration FONT SELECT Select a font from the stored fonts Sii FONT SELECT e GB18030 Simplified Chinese BIG 5 Traditional Chinese GB18030 KSX1001 Korean BIG5 YES KSX1001 YES ys YES Printable NO Non printable
99. 1 Installing the Optional SD Card ccccccccceccccesceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeaeeeeesaeeeeeeas 34 2 8 2 Removing the Optional SD Gard senaren e e a 35 2 8 3 Installing the Optional USB M MO y ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeessaeneeees 35 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 1 Table of Contents 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media eeee e eee eee 37 3 1 Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon 37 3 2 Eoading INE HIDDOR eii eiie i tac osi ve Uere eie ba ato a Eve eue cus Cacus eraai 38 3 9 REMOVING ING HIDDOB 5iioeieco ia esce sic PE aa E aa 41 SX NIOrSu r ne c O 42 3 4 1 Adjusting the Position of the Media S nsSOl ccccsecccssseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseaes 42 SRoMBerieleauereee eta 43 3 5 1 Loading Label with DISPENSET iiio tiii te ee e ve tie SO oc tto es tutt aue telnet 43 3 5 2 Loading Media without Using Dispenser eseseeseeeeseeeses 46 4 Operation and Configuration e eese cesse eee cene nnn nnn 47 4 1 Display and OperallOl 2 ied rao hepate o nsa uuu Seve E eeu eps eE pu Ya cauaa uses e pan2uS ap mnnn 47 4 1 1 Normal Mode Display and ICONS cccccsseececeeeeeeceececseseecsaeeessaueesseseesseneeessaes 47 4 1 2 Setting Mode Menu and ICONS ccccceececcceeeeceeeeeeceeeeecseeseeseueeeese
100. 2 Print data 2 uonoeJip peoj eipeiw unit mm igs ewe ar Distance A inches sec consumption B _ 2 no 6e 160 120 8 180 150 The ribbon consumption might be different from the value in the above table depending on the ribbon condition S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 335 8 Appendix When a gap exists in the back of the label The figure and table below show the distance A from the end of printing to the next print start position with backfeed for printing It also shows the consumption of the ribbon B when the ribbon saver is operating lt Label gt lt Ribbon gt Print data Print data B Print data 2 N D Print data o D e 2 Condition 1 Print operation Backfeed 2 Setting Dispense distance 14 mm 0 55 PITCH and OFFSET of OFFSET VOLUME should be set to 0 00 PITCH OFFSET should be set to O 3 Print position Vertical print position is VOO1 unit mm es omer cata Distance A inches sec consumption B _ 2 40 25 5 40 25 1851 42 The ribbon consumption might be different from the value in the above table depending on the ribbon condition 396 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 10 4 Ribbon Specification for the Ribbon Saver Ribbon length Guaranteed operation speed of ribbon saver Up to 300 m roll 2 to 12 inches more than 15 mm of printing Under 69 mm in diameter U
101. 2 9 User Mode Model 86 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm N A Va i x MAC Address XXXXX XX XXOCXX Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status HSDEITIBOC Information PRINT SPEED 06 External signal Status PRINT DARKNESS 06 Sensor level Printer Configurati ES 380 rinter c onriguraton Adjustment mode PITCH OFFSET 00 User mode 49 49 Interface mode Interface mode SNMP CHARACTER CODE UTF 8 WLAN Setti WLAN Certificate 2 BYTE FONTS GB18030 Memory mode cue modi ONLY GB18030 MINCHO Advanced mode NOTICE FUNCTION CLEAN PRINTER RFID d cao ca NOTICE FUNCTION DISABLE System Others T Restart Printer NOTICE DISTANCE 000 0 999 NOTICE FUNCTION CHANGE ROLLER NOTICE FUNCTION DISABLE NOTICE DISTANCE 000 0 150 NOTICE FUNCTION CHANGE HEAD NOTICE FUNCTION DISABLE NOTICE DISTANCE 000 0 150 com 202 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 6 Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the Interface mode page is shown as follows continued to the next page Refer to Section 4 2 10 Interface Mode Interface Mode Model 86 ex 203dpi es Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XXOOCXXOOCXX XX P Y ALL d j Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Interface mode Display Status Information INTERFACE AUTO SELECT
102. 22 Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures EN55022 Warnung Warnung Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen In diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene Ma nahmen durchzuf hren Das Gerat ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 13 Before You Start HL AS PR KAZ AS FT EDI 4 88 8 17 a B JUR re h ud seam Go ien Pb Cd Cr6 PBB ENIE EAR e EJE ATARA FB 7t ABA MBERE x O 3121512 ee amas emn x O O O O oO ame teem x O O 0 0 0 ss of o oO Of Oo x esmas O O O O O O Q ERZAR EMREHAN PAS E1911SJ T11363 2006 H Tis Armee EUmESRESK BBOEHGEDLT X XRIECBeUBEUAmIEUIEBMEBIC 33 BM BERINS iIBSJT11363 2006 EFES imma EYIERBUIRSSCK Mite IApRiBFAHBR AiG PAFA IERdE2006fE2H28H ADA Rr ste ME Jeu cas 2006 5is2EBSIEERIAEK GATEPEARELA El ERE Brea JIM DELI OWS PETS RAE A BHRR o HIST EAB PLR A an ZERO FH EBUTERRERIM ERAH 10 ft 2 CRT AXE B 6 v3 ER EHI TR ZU hh EAMES AAR EARN oA iat ae a adc TERENS eso eR m
103. 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen l G X butt butt Pressing the 2 button on each screen will revert to the T SS INTERFACE MODE menu DISABLE cnmp FUNCTION A button ENABLE DREE 4 k ENABLE 4 button X button SNMP SET SELECT SNMP SETTING SNMP TRAP SET SNMP TRAP SET button X button SNMP SETTING button SNMP TRAP SET X button SNMP SETTING SNMP v1 v2c 1 SNMP v1 v2c 2 TRAP 1 TRAP 2 4 button X button 4 button TRAP TYPE SELECT SNMPv 1 SNMPv2c X button To the SNMP v1 v2c qu 4 button A X button 1 I 4 button To the SNMP v3 4 button FINISH SETTING NOt lt 7 button ves wW 3 a button YES button INTERFACE MODE z amp Hoi OGM s 78 S84 ex 886 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the INTERFACE MODE menu I X button USER NAME A ish I X button COMMUNITY NAME Bubl ic A 4 button X button COMMUNITY WRITE ENABLE DARYA 4 F 4 button X button PRIVACY PROTOCOL ON DES NONE 4
104. 6 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration SELECT MEMORY DESTINATION Select the memory to save the printer setting information The following options are available SD CARD SELECT MEMORY USB MEMORY DESTINATION Note USB MEMORY e Shows only if MEMORY MODE is set to SETTING SAVE e he setting information of the wireless LAN is saved only if the wireless LAN is connected READING SETTING SAVE Shows while the printer is reading the setting information data a s _ Em Automatically shows the WRITING screen upon completion WRITING SETTING SAVE Shows while the printer is writing the setting information data L3 WRITING Note S JE Shows the COMPLETE screen automatically upon completion COMPLETE Shows when the printer setting information has been saved to memory Note After three beeps the screen returns to MEMORY CARD MODE COMPLETE S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 117 4 Operation and Configuration SELECT MEMORY ORIGIN Select the memory to copy the printer setting information The following options are available e SD CARD e USB MEMORY Note Shows only if MEMORY MODE is set to SETTING UPLOAD READING SETTING UPLOAD Shows while the printer is reading the setting information data Note Automatically shows the WRITING screen upon completion WRITING SETTING UPLOAD Shows while the printer is writing the setting information data
105. 80 Print the media with 180 degree rotation DEG 180 Set the label size adjustment control e CMD The label size is set by command SIZE MODE AUTO The label size is measured automatically by the printer LCD The label size is set by the following screen CMD FW LCD 4 F Note When AUTO is selected the printer will automatically feed two blank labels to check the label size The printer will perform the checking function when SZPL emulation mode active in the following scenarios Printer power on Initial feed setting must be enabled in Service mode e After head open error clearance e When switching from SBPL mode to SZPL emulation mode e When change the size mode to AUTO from other mode If AUTO ONLINE FEED under Service mode is set to NO SIZE MODE will switch to CMD automatically The label size setting will be override by the Label Width PW or Label Length LL Zebra command if it is specify within the data stream regardless of the current Size Mode setting for example AUTO LCD LABEL SIZE ADJ WIDTH Set the width of the media The setting range varies depending on the following model LABEL SIZE ADJ Modei sening Range 30 Note Shows only if SIZE MODE is set to LCD 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 231 5 Emulation Mode LABEL SIZE ADJ HEIGHT Set the height of the media The setting range varies depending on the following model LABEL SIZE ADJ HEIGHT HERZ S84 ex 203 dpi S84 ex
106. 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration PARAMETER SETTING ISI oet the Bluetooth communication parameter ISI The setting range is from 0012 to 1000 PARAMETER Noles SETTING IST Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected and DETECTING 9800 SETTING is enabled LI You cannot set the ISI value if it is smaller than the ISW value e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PARAMETER SETTING ISW Set the Bluetooth communication parameter ISW The setting range is from 0011 to 1000 PARAMETER Note SETTING CSW Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected and DETECTING 9012 SETTING is enabled LL You cannot set the ISW value if it is greater than the ISI value The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PARAMETER SETTING PSI oet the Bluetooth communication parameter PSI The setting range is from 0012 to 1000 PARAMETER Note SETTING PSI Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected 9800 You cannot set the PSI value if it is smaller than the PSW value ix e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PARAMETER SETTING PSW Set the Bluetooth communication parameter PSW The setting range is from 0011 to 1000 PARAMETER Note SETTING PSM Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected 9012 e You cannot set the PSW value if it is greate
107. 86 ex Operator Manual 3 3 8 Appendix Output Waveform Print Data Head Open Head Close Press MI LINE button Print D E c Print End TYPE 1 PREND Paper End l l l Online MODE 1 L3 L MODE 2 J Select MODE1 or MODE2 in the EXT 9PIN SELECT display of the SERVICE MODE menu 3 74 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 13 6 Bluetooth Interface This interface complies with the Bluetooth Ver 2 0 EDR standard Basic Specifications Communication Distance 5 m 16 4 feet Security Level Level 1 No authentication default Level 2 1 PIN code authentication service level Level 2 2 PIN code authentication service level Level 3 PIN code authentication link level PIN Code 1 to 16 characters consisting of ASCII code 20H 21H 23H to 7EH Disconnect Timeout 60 seconds LMP layer S84 ex 886 ex Operator Manual 375 8 Appendix 8 13 Wireless LAN Interface This interface complies with the IEEE802 11b g n standard N CAUTION Before using wireless LAN near medical devices and facilities consult your system administrator Basic Specifications Protocol Status3 Status4 Status5 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Initial 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Initial 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Initial 192 168 1 2 Data Transfer Method 802 11n max 135 Mbps 802 11b max 11 Mbps 802 119 max 54 Mbps N
108. 99 NONE 000 0 999 126 0 255 584 0 255 044 0 255 WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer SDPL Emulation CTRL CODE TYPE USER CODE SOH USER CODE STX USER CODE CR USER CODE CNTBY LABEL ROTATION FORMAT ATTRIBUTE PAUSE MODE SOP EMULATION 1 BY TE CODEPAGE MEASURE UNIT COMPATIBILITY TTF SIPL Emulation FORMAT STORE FONT c20 PITCH CODEPAGE Submit CUSTOM og 00 FF 02 00 FF op 00 FF 9E 00 FF DISABLE INVERSE DISABLE PROD 110 CP 858 Inch DISABLE Disable 0 SLASH On 4 Operation and Configuration S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 21 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 15 System Others Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the System Others page is shown as follows Model 86 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XX XX0CXXO0CXX ASA AS Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status a Information Sysytem Web Configuration External signal Status Sensor level USER NAME admin Printer Configuration PASSWORD admin Adjustment mode User mode Display Option Interface mode Interface model SNMP WLAN Setting LCD BRIGHTNESS 16 WLAN Certificate 0 32 Memory mode Service mode BUZZER SOUND 2 Advanced m
109. A Press the lt P buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to set the character Then press the ENTER button to save the file name DATA EXISTS OVERWRITE This screen confirms that you are overwriting a file if you have selected to save to an existing file name DATA EXISTS OVERWRITE Select the following options using the lt P buttons and then press the ENTER button e YES Overwrite the existing file NO Cancel the overwrite and return to the SET NAME screen Note Make sure that you do not need the existing file before overwriting it RECEIVE DATA COPYING This screen shows that the received data is being copied SAVE COMPLETED shows when the received data is fully copied Note RECEIVE DATA Three beeps will sound if the printer fails to copy the received data The COPYING printer returns to the STANDALONE MODE screen SAVE COMPLETED This screen shows when the received data is saved to a specified file Press the 4 ENTER button to return to the STANDALONE MODE screen SAVE COMPLETED PRESS ENTER KEY S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 67 4 Operation and Configuration SELECT FILE Select the file name of the print data using the A V buttons and then press the lt ENTER button SELECT FILE The XXXXXX in the screen shows the file name of the print data Only existing file names in the selected interface are displayed XXXXXX When sequential data are includ
110. A Wrriek Sins 1 SRE FARABR RERERARAR JUEMI T GE RAVEBEEOR AMRE SA AM ROK ERFAR Pett SERA VETERI HBKRAAH TS in B Sa A FH ADAE ALTE ETT ANE 2 ARS PARA MRAR TEA oon ee RRA XPT S SVEVIJENS RU TAS Mh Boob on Pans m nn 2 oe fe ARAB BE a e 14 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Parts Identification 11 Printer Orientation This printer has two types of orientation as below The media feed direction varies depending on the type of orientation Media feed direction Media feed direction Americas Standard Right Hand Americas Opposite Left Hand Europe Asia Left Hand Europe Asia Right Hand Note The pictures in this manual show the S84 ex Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Left Hand printer unless otherwise stated When using the right hand Americas Opposite Left Hand Europe Right Hand model the picture on the right shows a symmetrical opposite view of your printer When using the S86 ex printer the dimension of the media compartment is larger 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 15 1 Parts Identification 1 2 Parts Identification of the Printer 1 2 1 Front View n Operator panel 2 LCD 3 Top cover 4 Power I O switch Press this switch to power on I or power off O the printer 5 Media discharge outlet 16 S84 ex 8S86 ex Operator Manual 1 2 2 Rear View Se x dE 84 ex S86 ex Americas Opposite Left Hand Europe Asia Right Hand pr
111. A COMPLETED This screen shows that the printer has completed the transmission of SEND BACK DATA YET SEND BACK DATA ote The printer returns to the HEX DUMP MODE screen after three beeps COMPLETED S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 165 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 15 RFID User Mode The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the RFID user mode The table describes each setting screen in detail RFID USER MODE Di mac 4 773 Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the RFID 8 8 USER MODE menu Press the 4 gt A or Y button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen 4 button X button i RFID LIFE COUNT Shows only when the SUCCESS 000000 button PASSWORD input is enabled FAILURE 000000 TOTAL 000000 4 button X button RFID COUNT SUCCESS 000000 FAILURE 000000 TOTAL 000000 4 button CLEAR RFID COUNT 4 button X button RFID LABEL DATA RELEASE shi 4 F 4 button I X button MAX ERR COUNT TIME S 4 button X button RFID ERR SLASH RFID ERR OUTPUT Select LEVEL PULSE Hage 4 F Select PULSE 4 button X button 1 LENGTH OF PULSE msec T 4 button X button 1 READER VERSION M6e Micro XX XX XX XX PRESS ENTER KEY 166 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual X button VIEW EPC DATA VIEW TID DATA VIEW USER
112. A EPC and TID Y PREND TYPE 3 4 NORMAL Y MCS MCS DISABLE Y Pre Encoded Tag DISABLE M Chip Manufacture IMPINJ M MCS Prefix AUTO Y MCS Prefix Digit 0 Y MCS Prefix Data Prefix Digit 1 0 1 Prefix Digit 2 00 11 Prefix Digit 3 000 111 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 215 216 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 14 Emulation Mode Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the Emulation mode page is shown as follows continued to the next page Refer to Section 5 2 SZPL Emulation Mode Section 5 3 SDPL Emulation Mode or Section 5 4 SIPL Emulation Mode ASA 2709 Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status Information External signal Status Sensor level Printer Configuration Adjustment mode User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer Emulation Mode SZPL Emulation ROTATE LABEL SIZE MODE LABEL WIDTH LABEL HEIGHT LABEL SHIFT LABEL TOP HEAD CHECK PROTOCOL RS 485 NETWORK ID CONTROL HEADER COMMAND HEADER DELIMITER S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XXXXCXXOOCXX XX 0 AUTO 1340 0 1340 01424 0 09992 0000 1340 1340 0000 120 120 0000 0 99
113. Adjustment Mode for details 1 When the printer is in online mode press the gt Il LINE button to change the printer to offline mode 2 Press the 4 ENTER button The printer changes to setting mode menu ONLINE MODE mae wat d e 3 Select the USER MODE using the A V lt 4 gt buttons USER MODE i rif USER MODE shows on the screen and the icon is UN 1 highlighted in reverse i vi DO ee W as 4 Press the ENTER button to enter the user mode OFFSEI VOLUME OFFSET VOLUME shows on the screen PITCH 0 00 o OFFSET 0 00 Note DARKNESS 90 If password function is enabled PASSWORD is shown on the screen instead In this case enter the password first 252 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 5 Press the ENTER button again until PRINT DARKNESS shows on the screen PRINT DARKNESS 6 Press the A V buttons to select a value The setting range is from 1 to 10 1 is the lightest 06 and 10 is the darkest F Press the 4 ENTER button to save the setting 8 Press the FUNCTION button to return to the setting mode menu 6 4 Adjusting the Print Speed The adjustment of the print speed not only changes the speed of printing but also affects the print quality The setting range of the print speed varies depending on the following print resolution Model Print Resolution Print Speed Setting Range 4 to 12 inches sec The adjustment procedu
114. Ba Worms o ess fcaRosuorseuecTsiowo RM Ya w wwowvwon MeMoNSzE IStoDCONENIS FORMOVERAK ewoo N Fomara oo o o oo 8 1 5 Advanced Mode Default Default PRINTER TYPE DISPENSER DISPENSER Ye Ye BACKFEED MOTION BEFORE Yes Ye PRINT METHOD TRANSFER Set to DIRECT with direct Yes Yes thermal model PITCH SENSOR ENABLE When CONTINUOUS is Yes Yes selected SENSORTYPE O oP Yes Sf es SENSOR TYPE es Yes COMMAND ERROR DISABLE 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 295 8 Appendix Default Default Setting Item Initial Value Shipping DISABLE eg we We HEAD CHECK NORMAL When HEAD CHECK is Yes Yes enabled HEAD CHECK MODE ALL When HEAD CHECK is enabled HEAD CHECK PAGE NO 000001 When CHECK PAGE is selected EXTERNAL SIGNAL SETTING EXTERNAL SIGNAL CEN E HIN CHE Y 00 es HEAD DOT DENSITY 3 Y only for S84 ex S86 ex 12 dots mm Z om 296 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Setting Item SET CALENDAR 8 Appendix Default Default Initial Value User Shipping CALENDAR 11 01 01 00 00 ewe wow CALENDAR INPUT 11 01 01 00 00 No Yes CALENDAR DAY OF WEEK CODE CALENDAR MONTH CODE SUNDAY 1 MONDAY 2 TUESDAY 3 WEDNESDAY 4 THURSDAY 5 FRIDAY 6 SATURDAY 7 JANUARY A FEBRUARY B MARCH C APRIL D MAY E JUNE F JULY G AUGUST H SEPTEMBER J OCTOBER K NOVE
115. CATION LEVEL Set the Bluetooth authentication level The following options are available l NONE No authentication Authentication Level 2 1 PIN code authentication service level Level Level 2 2 PIN code authentication service level NONE Level 3 PIN code authentication link level level 2 1 Note e Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PIN CODE oet the Bluetooth PIN code You can enter a maximum of sixteen characters including alphabet upper case and lower case numbers and symbols PIN CODE Note J A g000000000000000 Ax e Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again DEVICE NAME set the device name for the printer You can enter a maximum of twenty characters including alphabet upper case and lower case numbers and symbols DEVICE NAME SATO PRINTER Note e Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again DISCOVERY SETTING Enable or disable the Bluetooth detection response ENABLE Enable the Bluetooth detection response DISCOVERY DISABLE Disable the Bluetooth detection response SETTING NS DISABLE 4 F Note e Shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 108 S
116. CHANGE HEAD Notify when to perform replacement of the print head 2 BYTE FONIS GB18030 BIG5 2 BYTE FONTS MINCHO GOTHIC 4 F NOTIFICATION FUNCTION SETTING YES W 4 F NOTICE FUNCTION CLEAN PRINTER CHANGE ROLLER NOTICE FUNCTION ENABLE DISABLE Enable or disable the notification for the item selected in the above NOTICE FUNCTION e ENABLE Enable the notification function e DISABLE Disable the notification function 74 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual NOTICE FUNCTION ENABLE METRE 4 F 4 Operation and Configuration CLEAN PRINTER set the notification distance for cleaning the printer The setting range is from 000 to 999 m CLEAN PRINTER NOTICE DISTANCE Note 000 m The notification function will be disabled if the distance is set to O 1h CHANGE ROLLER Set the notification distance for changing the platen roller The setting range is from 000 to 150 km CHANGE ROLLER NOTICE DISTANCE Note 000 km The notification function will be disabled if the distance is set to O EL CHANGE HEAD Set the notification distance for changing the print head The setting range is from 000 to 150 km CHANGE HEAD NOTICE DISTANCE Note 000 km The notification function will be disabled if the distance is set to O Ax SETTING FINISH Confirm to complete the setting e YES Returns to the user mode screen SETTING FINISH NO Returns to the NOTICE FUNCTION screen to select an item
117. D card f the item selected on the UPLOAD SELECT screen does not have Press A button data to be uploaded nothing will be uploaded Power On Selecting ALL will upload all the items on the UPLOAD SELECT Screen Screen messages are shown in English regardless of the setting INTERFACE SELECT value on the SELECT LANGUAGE screen SD CARD USB MEMORY 4 button UPLOAD SELECT F TRMWARE 4 button Upload Yes completed No READING XX XX Reading the data Finished receiving the uploaded data Writing the data WRITING XX XX S E Finished writing the uploaded data 3 short beeps when the upload is completed PROGRAM UPLOAD COMPLETED 4 button S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 189 4 Operation and Configuration INTERFACE SELECT Select the upload method e SD CARD Upload data to an SD card INTERFACE SELECT e USB MEMORY Upload data to a USB memory SD CARD Nolen usB MEMORY The setting information of the wireless LAN is saved only if the wireless LAN is connected UPLOAD SELECT Select the item to be uploaded FIRMWARE Upload Firmware e 2 BYTE FONTS Upload 2 byte fonts and Outline font UPLOAD SELECT CONFIG Upload printer configurations FONT LOGO Upload font logo data F TRMWARE STS5 LOG Upload Status5 log 2 BYTE FONTS ALL Upload all data READING XX XX UPLOAD The printer is reading the uploaded dat
118. DATA VIEW PC DATA YES W Select YES 4 button Select NO X button 4 button ANTENNA PITCH SEM SHORT 4 F 4 button X button RFID TAG OFFSET 4 button I X button WRITE POWER 10mW DANGER ij 4 button X button i READ POWER 10mW INE GBR lt button l Select ENABLE lt 1 button ENABLE DRESS is 4 F Select DISABLE l 4 button i X button LOG ENABLE MIBZSNS 4 F 4 button I X button LOG DATA EPC and TID EPC 4 button RFID USER MODE 26 o 7 T eic AD s ish Select RETRY lt button or X button ee Be eK ru 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the RFID USER MODE menu mo ee USE When reading is collected 0123456 789ABCDEF 01234567 RETRY QQNueies 4 F error occurs X button Pre Encoded Tag ENABLE METRE 4 F 4 button X button Chip Manufacture IMPINJ 4 button X button MCS Prefix DU MANUAL 4 F Select MANUAL ose A button X button MCS Prefix Digit 9 DIGIT DIGIT S lt button X button MCS Prefix Data loo 4 button When reading NO TAG FOUND RETRY Kops 4 F 4 button Select AUTO
119. DJUST LEVEL manipulates the potentiometer which will be therefore reset to 90 the default value when replacing the PCB or initializing the settings 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments Low level lt 1 0V SENSOR LEVEL MARK R 8 Take a note of the I MARK R value from the above procedure This is the Low level value for the l mark sensor Next check the High level voltage of the l mark sensor 9 Unlock the media feed and media sensor assembly v 10 Physically place the I mark media again so that the media sensor can sense the l mark 11 Press the media feed and media sensor assembly down to lock it To get the correct adjustment result close the media sensor assembly before performing the adjustment 12 Check the new I MARK R value This is the High level value for the I mark sensor If the difference between the High and the Low level values is 1 0 V or more then the adjustment has satisfied the criteria If the difference between the High and the Low level values is less than 1 0 V repeat the procedure from steps 4 through 12 Criteria for Adjustment Low level portion without I mark High level I mark position Low level High level SENSOR LEVEL MARK R x ADJUST LEVEL DET S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 259 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 13 Press the ENTER button to confirm the setting and proc
120. E FORWARD BACKFEED DISTANCE Set the feed length in the forward and backward directions e DEFAULT Enable the printer to operate using the fixed value maintained in the printer FORWARD BACKFEED 000mm Set the feed length to enable the printer to operate using this DISTANCE distance The setting range of forward backward feed length is from 001 mm to 255 mm 0 04 to 10 yazua 000mm The actual forward backward feed length is equivalent to the offset adjustment value the paper feed length Note e If using thermal transfer for printing set the feed distance to less than 30 mm 1 2 to avoid detection of the ribbon end by mistake e If the value is larger than the distance between the print head and the option stop position the media may shift away from the platen during backward feed EXT 9PIN SELECT oet the output mode of the external signal pin 9 when using a 14 pin connector pin 6 when using a 25 pin connector EXT 9PIN SELECT e MODE1 The output signal becomes Active when there is remaining print data without error in online mode MODET e MODE2 The output signal becomes Active when the printer is MODE2 ONLINE Note Refer to the Timing Chart of the EXT Output Signal Online for details S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 129 4 Operation and Configuration PREND TYPE 3 4 Select whether to reflect the label feed stop timing on PREND output signal in External signal MODES 4 PREND TYPE 3 4 NORMAL
121. Error and Reset MING usse eodd Dre pa dnb eet S e ERU Ede nagd iu e aed on ete 343 8 11 3 External EXT Signal Interfaces when RFID Module is Enabled 346 61 ARID A PANNO TIDS scctecacsacsar E 347 8 12 daleii ighs or ell ez Lio p 348 Sole AOWA ee seus IER Lee AED Mi up i ILE INR DA I IUE 348 9 P2228 IDDOM Ez Ia o M Medd NEN RT 350 ad Medal MERE RT UT T TI UU MT 351 98 12 4 BUTI UNCON S soecct set icta cuts do bee choned beer ub an Id ipa mtotoume i2 S Mo a Nina a i epa ta decode 352 912 5 Printer Eanguaddesssiesscertni a iet nina tidwm st Lotuen e oin nM ui cia DLE 352 8 12 6 Fonts SymbolS Barcodes ccccccscesseceeecscsseeceecesscasseeeeesscosseeeeeessasseeeeesssooeses 353 9 12 7 ODDS auus nner eee mer d urat oM mene tre crn te cme err MUN a eee 355 9 12 98 ACCESS ONICS cannae iaaio tates uu Miesniem M Uc D Game aene 355 9 12 9 SANG AGS csse cni uvie tat erem etd nem edited TENE UM CUM delia sana rat redes encanta ane 355 8 13 Interface SpecifiCatlON sissu eisenii oio ocio instante 356 9d USB merde paseos REED ERURANER OMM ECKE Sta re o3S ACE RuMed viales qut UE snes 357 oO To 2 LAN ElllemebInterfdeg ssstuc eti a eub Geddes tu bte Datus Daun de D ne 358 9 19 9 BHo 232 C IMC aCe usto vit a fab cuts Nvv Ceu papu Nave Sauer E DNO 360 9 49 4 IE BEI 284 IMC dO Osca te n toits ee Rat bc ead st hY S Ra CREER DUET ROPA P aea x E elaine 362 9 13 5 External Signal Intertace EXT iicet ERE et eo beoe teh bie iut
122. F S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 163 4 Operation and Configuration HEX DUMP Set the memory for saving the hex dump data The file name of the data to be saved Is created from DATA_001 DAT in sequence HEX DUMP A maximum of one hundred hex dump data can be saved When saving file with one hundred files already in the media the older file starting from the first number 001 will be overwritten in sequence e SD Save data to an SD card e USB Save data to a USB memory Note For installation and removal of the memory refer to Section 2 8 Installing Optional Memory Storage e Three beeps will sound if you press the lt ENTER button when the selected memory is not installed ONLINE This screen shows an online status icon if RECEIVE DATA is selected HEX DUMP PRINT E ONL INE QTY 000000 HEX DUMP SAVE E ONL I NE zo err QTY 000000 OFFLINE This screen shows an offline status icon if RECEIVE DATA or INTERNAL DATA is selected E OFFLINE QTY 000000 164 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration ONLINE This screen shows an online status icon if INTERNAL DATA is selected E ONLINE QTY 000000 OFFLINE This screen shows an offline status icon if RECEIVE BUFFER is selected OFFLINE g QTY 000000 SEND BACK DATA TRANSMITTING This screen shows while the printer is transmitting the SEND BACK DATA SEND BACK DATA TRANSMITTING SEND BACK DAT
123. For details on the work shift setting mode refer to Section 4 2 6 Work Shift Setting Mode S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 191 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 22 Wireless LAN Certificate Download Mode This mode allows the user to download the wireless LAN certification data The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the wireless LAN certificate download mode The table describes each setting screen in detail N CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card D p Power on iis iis CERT DOWNLOAD CERT DOWNLOAD COMPLETED FAILED Waiting to be powered off Waiting to be powered off 192 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration CERT DOWNLOAD Select the download method of the certification data e SD CARD Download data from an SD card CERT DOWNLOAD e USB MEMORY Download data from a USB memory SD CARD USB MEMORY READING CERT DOWNLOAD The printer is reading the certification data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the certification data reading progress PH READING 5L o 0 0 JE WRITING CERT DOWNLOAD The printer is writing the certification data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the certification data writ
124. I I I I I l I I I I I I I 00 km AX X button 1 button l X button gt gt 777 T7 J SETTING FINISH oulon Select NO 4 button Select YES M button OFFSET VOLUME The setting values of the adjustment mode are shown PITCH Shows the print position offset value OFFSET VOLUME e OFFSET Shows the stop position offset value PITCH 0 00 e DARKNESS Shows the darkness setting value OFFSET 0 00 DARKNESS 90 You can change these values in Adjustment Mode and Test Print Mode 72 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual PRINT SPEED The setting range varies depending on the model 584 ex 203 dpi 4 to 16 ips inches sec S86 ex 203 dpi 4 to 14 ips inches sec S84 ex 305 dpi 4 to 14 ips inches sec S86 ex 305 dpi 4 to 12 ips inches sec S84 ex 609 dpi 2 to 6 ips inches sec Note Setting the print speed to a level that is too fast may affect the print quality PRINT DARKNESS Specify the print darkness from ten steps The setting range is from 1 to 10 1 is the lightest and 10 is the darkest PITCH OFFSET This setting adjusts the pitch offset value The media pitch is the distance between the leading edge the edge that comes out of the printer first of the media and the leading edge of the next media Once the position has been set it can be fine adjusted using the PITCH POSITION in adjustment mode The setting range is from 49 mm 1 9 to
125. ID reprint twice One shot Pulse Output Waveform RFID write error End of error print Print Print End PREND TYPE1 CL TYPE2 1 TYPE 3 TYPE 4 I l Paper End Ribbon End l l RFID tag error gt pu 100 500 ms Machine Error RFID write error End of error print Print Print End PREND TYPE1 Ene TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4 l l Paper End Ribbon End l l RFID tag errr gt 100 500 ms Machine Error RFID write error End of error print Print End PREND TYPE1 Le TYPE2 m TYPE3 TYPE 4 Print l l Paper End Ribbon End l RFID tag error pu 100 500 ms Machine Error 344 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Timing chart of error signal output with long pulse RFID reprint twice Level Output Waveform RFID write error End of error print Print Print End hH PREND TYPE 1 H 20ms TYPE2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4 l Paper End Ribbon End RFID tag error a NM Machine Error RFID write error End of error print Print Print End CEPS X mim Hom TYPE 3 TYPE 4 l Paper End Ribbon End RFID tag error Machine Error Print Print End PREND TYPE 1 l TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4 l Paper End Ribbon End RFID tag error Machine Error S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 345 8 Appendix 8 11 3 External EXT
126. ISTRY COMPLETED This screen shows the completion of the font registry Three beeps will sound when the font registry is completed The printer returns to the DOWNLOAD READY screen FA FONT REGISTRY Note 44 T Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE COMPLETED FONT DELETE COMPLETED This screen shows the completion of the font deletion Three beeps will sound when the font deletion is completed The printer returns to the DOWNLOAD READY screen FH FONI DELETE Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE COMPLETED DOWNLOAD SELECT Select the item to be downloaded FIRMWARE Download Firmware 2 byte fonts and Outline font DOWNLOAD SELECT 2 BYTE FONTS Download 2 byte fonts and Outline font CONFIG Download printer configurations alitis FONT LOGO Download font logo data 2 BYTE FONTS ALL Downl ownload all data CONFIG nce oO FONT LOGO Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to SD CARD or USB MEMORY S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 187 4 Operation and Configuration READING XX XX DOWNLOAD The printer is reading the downloaded data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data reading progress PA XX XX shows the file number being read and total number of files After reading the data it goes to the WRITING screen on zm U Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to SD CARD or USB MEMORY WRITING XX XX DOWNLOAD
127. If not change ADJUST LEVEL using the A V SENSOR LEVEL buttons until the I MARK R value is 2 2 V or higher MARK R ADJUST LEVEL BET am Criteria for Adjustment I MARK R value liner without label I MARK R value without any media 10 Press the ENTER button to confirm the setting 11 Press the FUNCTION button to return to the SERVICE MODE menu 264 S84 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 66 Adjusting the Head Pressure Balance Print head balance refers to the equalization of pressure between the print head and the platen roller If the print head balance is out of adjustment the printed image will be darker on one side of the media than the other and the media will be prone to travel in the direction of greater pressure Setting the Criteria of the Head Pressure Balance e Set the pressure balance according to the media width e Set the head pressure according to the media thickness including the liner Required tool Slotted screw driver The adjustment procedure for the pressure balance is as follows 1 Open the top cover of the printer 2 Juhehsadisciisvardacloskwisodo unlock the print head 3 Then turn the head lock lever back before it locks You can find the adjustment dial 2 beside the head lock lever as shown Shows the actual set balance S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 265 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 4 Us
128. LE Disable the item number check function ENABLE MINNS Note 4 Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUSS5 O2 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration BCC CHECK Set the BCC check function ENABLE Enable the BCC check function BCC CHECK e DISABLE Disable the BCC check function ENABLE MISI SSNE Note 4k Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUS5 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 93 4 Operation and Configuration LAN Wireless LAN Setting Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the INTERFACE MODE menu DHCP SETTING ENABLE DARAS z 4 k DHCP DISABLE a button DHCP ENABLE button IPv4 ADDRESS i92 168 001 001 Ax IPv4 SUBNET MASK B55 255 255 000 Ax 4 button X button IPv4 GATEWAY ADR 000 000 000 000 3Axk DHCP DISABLE X button DHCP ENABLE X button X button Sh ly wh Pv RESOLUTION P AUTO Select DHCP or AUTO lt button MANUAL Select DHCP or Select MANUAL AUTO X button lt button I I l I I l I I l X button I IPv6 ADDRESS DEFAULT ROUTER 000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 i 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 l 0000 0000 TT 0000 0000 I l I I l I I l I l X button
129. MBER L DECEMBER M NON STANDARD CODE SETTING STX 7Bh ETX 7Dh ESC 5Eh ENQ 40h CAN 21h NULL 7Eh OFFLINE 5Dh Yes with Default ALT PROTOCOL Fmoweuenon o ws Y LABEL SIZE ADJ WIDTH LABEL SIZE ADJ HEIGHT S84 ex 8 dots mm 12 dots mm 24 dots mm 8 dots mm 12 dots mm S86 ex 8 dots mm 12 dots mm 24 dots mm 8 dots mm 12 dots mm C N va De o 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 29 8 Appendix Default Default Setting Item Initial Value Shipping LCD POWER SAVING OOMIN a lt ERROR INDICATION NONE 8 1 6 Hex Dump Mode Default Default SELECT DUMP DATA RECEIVE DATA RECEIVE DATA o beo booo HEX DUMP NORMAL booo fe 8 1 7 RFID User Mode 00 Sotingtem ave NM te Reo ure count sucoess oo e p o FPADLFECOUNTrALURE o0 oo FRADLFECOUNTTOTAL omo lamamucuw o p p o VIEW EPC DATA NO VIEW TID DATA VIEW USER DATA VIEW PC DATA 2908 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Setting Item Initial Value tise sien Pre Encoded Tag DISABLE pe vosme p Ne w 8 1 8 Test Print Mode zm Default Default TEST PRINT MODE CONFIGURATION DEDE TEST PRINT SIZE S84 ex 10cm S86 ex 16cm When CONFIGURATION BARCODE an CHECK is selected LARGE When FACTORY WLAN is selected LABEL LENGTH 10cm ee CONFIGURE LIST is selected PITCH POSITION POSITION Varied 0 REN a I I 8 1 9 Default Setting Mode ini Default Default DEFAULT MODE P
130. Media feed direction Media stop position in dispense mode Print head mr Le 5 mm 0 2 I mark sensor lt gt Dm lY LR CEN t Gap sensor 15 mm 0 6 120 mm 126 mm 4 7 4 9 S84 ex 5 mm 66 mm 0 2 2 6 S86 ex 5 mm 81 mm 0 2 3 2 Frame S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 307 8 Appendix 0 3 About Compatible Mode When you set the COMPATIBLE MODE to ON in the service mode menu you can match the printer operation to the existing models Refer to COMPATIBLE MODE in Function Settings of the service mode menu 8 3 1 Compatible Mode The following table shows the operation of the compatible mode Print density change Head dot density setting No setting screen A function to draw data according to the screen is shown in the head density when the head density is 12 advanced mode dots mm 84 ex Select from 100 150 300 86 ex Select from 150 300 ESC AX Print area expansion setting The command is enabled The command is disabled When the printer received the command the command is discarded without command error ESC AR Print area standard setting The command is enabled The command is disabled When the printer received the command the command is discarded without command error Graphic printing partial copy specify WD No rotation The image is rotated and white and black inverse printing lt gt are not rotated by the rotation s
131. NAL REPRINT DISABLE Disable the reprint ENABLE DRYAS Note 4 ok The printer will not reprint if a command error occurs CONTINUOUS PRINT oet the reprint function by the print start signal from an external signal e ENABLE Enable the continuous print CONTINUOUS PRINT DISABLE Disable the continuous print ENABLE DRS 4 F 150 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration ENHANCED REPRINT Set the reprint function by the reprint signal from an external signal ENABLE The printer reprints regardless of the remaining print ENHANCED REPRINT quantity DISABLE Disable the enhanced reprint ENABLE MINDE 4 F Note Shows only if EXTERNAL REPRINT is enabled I O SIGNAL SETTING Select whether or not to set the pin number for the input output signal e YES Proceed to the INPUT SIGNAL screen 0 SIGNAL NO Proceed to the I O SIGNALS INITIALIZE screen SETTING D S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 151 4 Operation and Configuration INPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SIGNAL Set the pin number for the input output signal The setting details are as follows INPUT SIGNAL Signal Name Input Default Overla Available PRINT START Pin Output Pin No pping Pin No PRINT START Can be set to REPRINT 8Pin Allowed 8 or 20 ed LABEL NEAR Pin REPRINT Input Not Z Allowed FEED Pin LABEL NEAR END Input 7 Not Can be setto Allowed 7 or 21 Function FEED Input 21 Not die bid Al
132. NCEL PRINT JOB screen when the printer is in offline mode Returns to the previous setting screen when the printer is in setting mode lt gt A V Arrow buttons Navigate the selection or set numbers in the screen menu Press the A button to adjust the buzzer volume when the printer is in normal mode Press the A and V buttons for one second to enter the adjustment mode when the printer is in normal mode 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 19 1 Parts Identification 1 3 2 LED Indicator emma CO 01 e Light off Power off or offline mode Printer error For example when a machine error is detected NS 1 A4 4 Printer error For example when the ribbon runs out Flashes at intervals of two seconds Suis Blue and Printer error For example when a communication error has e red occurred VV14 4 Alternately flashes blue and red 20 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Installing the Printer 2 1 Installation Precautions Install this printer in a location as follows A location that is horizontal and stable When you install the printer onto a support structure applicator the complete assembly must be sturdy and stable Attach the support structure firmly to the floor or on production machinery e A location that has sufficient space for operating the printer Install the printer so that the media dispenser side is within the designated distance and height relative
133. NMP WLAN Pire Secret Key File WLAN Certificate PASSWORD Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode PAC File RFID mode Emulation mode PASSWORD System Others Restart Printer 2 Select a file and press Submit Selected file type Select a file Choose File No file chosen Submit 208 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 10 Memory Mode Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the Memory mode page is shown as follows Refer to Section 4 2 11 Memory Mode Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Add CXXOXXOOCXXOOCXX NAVA SY F ee Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status NSIBorymode Information CARD SLOT SELECT SLOTO External signal Status Sensor level CARD SLOT SELECT SLOT1 a E CARD SLOT SELECT SLOT2 Adjustment mode User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Submit Service mode NR Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 209 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 11 Service Mode Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the Service mode page is shown as follows continued to the next page Refer to
134. OAD DEDE OUTPUT LABEL QTY 000001 aoo Ig 8 1 14 Wireless LAN Setting MACAddress MAC address Not configurable O NULL IPSetupMethod DHCP BOOTP setting 7 ae N Yi LocallPAddress IP Address Yi SubnetMask Subnet Mask Yi Yi S DISABLE S 192 168 1 1 S 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 2 XXX e GatewayAddress Gateway Address Ye S 0 0 0 0 e e S DNSPrimarylPAddress DNS primary address e DNSSecondarylPAddress DNS secondary address Yes 0 0 0 0 WLANMode Wireless LAN mode 0 Ad Hoc mode Ves Kobilscemene setting 1 Infrastructure mode ESSID SSID 1 32 characters S SATO PRINTER 0 Open System 1 Shared Key 2 WPA 3 WPA2 WEP key OFF ON WEPKeylndex WEP Key Index Y 802 1x authentication 0 DISABLE camel OFF ON 1 ENABLE Ye Ye WLANNetworkAuth Network authentication Yes Open System S DISABLE S S S S S 1 Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye e Ye S DISABLE 302 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Setting Item EAPAuthMode ON WPA WPA2 0 PSK ixoc eu Authentication setting 1 EAP WPA WPA2 Encryption 0 TKIP NIPARI MOOS Method setting 1 AES WPAPSK Advanced shared key 8 63 characters EAPUserName cu suMeMlcaleg user 0 64 characters name EAPPassword cn uenticalion 0 32 characters Y password EAPCertKeyPassword za password See 0 32 characters Y key acquisition iii EAPCertRoot WPAEAPAuthMode WPAEAPUserName WPAEAPPassword EAPTTLSInAuth TTLS server 0
135. OE z 2 4kQ Transistor IN Ww isl Ge Q Photo coupler Pow Q Y EXT O Photo Mos FET Q Q E our_com ol OUT Q Q 368 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Timing Chart of the EXT Input Signal Input Waveform Printed 1 piece Print Start PRIN Reprint PRIN2 Print Print Start Print End TYPE 1 Print Start PRIN Reprint PRIN2 Print Print End TYPE 1 G PREND 20 ms TYPE2 E wes L TYPE 4 L EBEN am Rou Un T o Un _ c p ox X z e c X Q D Y S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 369 8 Appendix Supplementary explanation Keep the print start signal PRIN to Low until print end signal PREND is output Refer to the below Maintaining the Print Start Signal PRIN timing chart Keep the output reprint signal PRIN2 for more than 10 ms When signal is output for shorter than 10 ms and reprint signal is not acknowledged the printer does not perform reprinting Maintaining the Print Start Signal PRIN Input Waveform TYPE 1 2 Printed 1 piece Print Start PRIN Reprint PRIN2 Print Print End T PREND TYPE 3 4 c fS 7 i a Print Start PRIN Reprint There is no problem to make the PRIN signal to High PRIN2 during the dotted line with TYPE 3 and 4 7 Print Print End TYPE 3 PREND TYPE 4 370 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Timing Chart
136. OFFSET Oa mm 4 button le mepe om m mm m m mm m m mm m m um m m um m m mmm m mm m m mum m m um m m um m m um m m mm ml S C 126 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the SERVICE MODE setting screen I X button TOTAL QTY DISPLAY 4 button X button PLUG amp PLAY aid DISABLE 4 F 4 button X button REGION CODE CANADA SINGAPORE 1 4 button X button REPLY PERIOD MUN FAST X button ENQ REPLY DELAY TIME YES KSX1001 YES js button X button ee mo n mm moo 0 m m G0 Rm m G0 Rm mm 0 mo m e m ee oum mum oe m 203dpi 305dpi Shows for the S86 ex series models only HEAD SELECT HEAD SELECT KPJ 168 85A08 KPJ 168 125408 SNP Um KPJ 168 12TA08 R Waiting to be Select YES lt button and when SAVE USER DEF T DEFAULT SETTING powered off there are changes in printer settings YES wW COMPLETED PLEASE POWER OFF 4 F Select NO 4 button Bou au ene a ee ee ete Lu d S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 127 4 Operation and Configuration AUTO ONLINE FEED Set the auto online feed function This function enables the printer to automatically feed media in online mode after power on AUTO
137. Operation and Configuration INTERFACE SELECT Select the download method INTERFACE Download the program from the interface INTERFACE SELECT e SD CARD Download the program from an SD card INTERFACE e USB MEMORY Download the program from a USB memory SD CARD USB MEMORY DOWNLOAD READY The printer is waiting to receive download data from the interface selected on the DATA PORT screen in the interface mode The following data will be received from the PC and written to the main FH ROM 1 Firmware data DOWNLOAD READY 2 Font logo data 3 TrueType font When firmware data is received it goes to the RECEIVING screen When font logo and TrueType font are received it goes to the FONT DOWNLOAD READY screen Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE FONT DOWNLOAD READY The printer is waiting to receive font data When downloading the font for the first time it goes to the RECEIVING screen FH When overwriting or deleting existing font data it goes to the DELETING screen 3 j FONT DOWNLOAD READY Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 185 4 Operation and Configuration DELETING The printer is deleting the existing font data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data deletion progress PH When overwriting font data after deleting it goes to the RECEIVING screen die DELETING When jus
138. Operator Manual For printer model 564m 506 e3 Copyrights Any unauthorized reproduction of the contents of this document in part or whole is strictly prohibited Limitation of Liability SATO Corporation and its subsidiaries in Japan the U S and other countries make no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material opecifications and contents in this document are subject to change without notice Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card Trademarks SATO is a registered trademark of SATO Holdings Corporation and its subsidiaries in Japan the U S and other countries Secure Digital SD Card is a registered trademark of the SD Card Association QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Version
139. RINTER SETTING e S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 299 8 Appendix 8 1 10 Service Mode Default Default morne owe De e MEE HE n FORWARD BACKFEED EE 4 DISTANCE LI EN NNNM u E COMPATIBLE MODE omman f jw COMPATIBLE MODE HEAD SIZE NORMAL COMPATIBLE MODE DARKNESS ENABLE PRINTER MODEL S84 ex S84 M8459Se S86 ex M8485 90 60 65Se MEDIA LENGTH S84 ex 8 dots mm 2500 mm Yes 12 dots mm 1500 mm 24 dots mm 400 mm S86 ex 1249 mm emma T OUTPUT PRINT LOG FROM DISABLE SUBPORT SETTING P Z D D O 300 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Default Default Setting Item Initial Value a RIBBON TENSION ADJUSTMENT TENSION ADJUSTMENT S amp 4 ex 8dotsimm 12 x 8 dots mm 12 12 dots mm 5 24 dots mm 1 8 dots mm 12 12 dots mm 5 mouer how o Ya e Fewo om Ys e momowosw o We w Backreeo orse omm We es muse e e o maono s ws N REPLY PERIOD NORMAL Ys No ENQ REPLY DELAY TIME 0000 ms Ys No am vs e w am ws e M xw ws e HEAD SELECT S86 ex 8 dots mm KST 172 8TAO8 S86 ex 12 dots mm KPJ 168 12TAO8 only for S86 ex series 8 1 11 Hidden Setting Mode ve Default Default 8 1 12 Work Shift Setting Mode Default Default ENTER SHIET TIME 24 00 TO s amp 8 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 301 8 Appendix 8 1 13 Simple Standalone Mode aa Default Default STANDALONE MODE L
140. RIVACY PROTOCOL PRIVACY KEY IPv4 6 SELECT IP Address Trap 3 FUNCTION TYPE SELECT COMMUNITY USER NAME AUTH PROTOCOL AUTH KEY PRIVACY PROTOCOL PRIVACY KEY IPv4 6 SELECT IP Address DISABLE SNMPv2c NONE NONE IPv4 0 0 0 0 DISABLE SNMPv2c NONE NONE IPv4 0 0 0 0 DISABLE SNMPv2c NONE NONE IPv4 0 0 0 0 4 Operation and Configuration Submit Note Reapply the setting data update after the system reboots S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 205 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 8 WLAN Setting Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the WLAN Setting page is shown as follows continued to the next page Refer to Section 8 1 14 Wireless LAN Setting Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Add CXXOXXCOOCXX QOCXX ASA 27 Pss Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World eiii a WLAN Setting Spey Status TCP IP Config nformation External signal Status IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 1 Sensor level SUBNET MASK 2552552550 Printer Configuration GATEWAY ADDRESS 192 168 12 Adjustment mode ai min DHCP BOOTP PROTOCOL DISABLE nterface mode Interface mode SNMP Wireless LAN Config WLAN Setting WIRELESS MODE AdHoc WLAN Certificate Memory mode SSID saro PRINTER Service mode CHANNEL 6 Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others WEP Key Config Resta
141. S84 ex S586 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 3 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head CAUTION The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury 4 Pul the feed lock latch to unlock the feed roller and media sensor assembly The feed roller and media sensor assembly flipped open 5 Pull the media guide away from the printer 6 Clean the dirt on the ribbon roller print head platen roller and pressure roller using a cleaning pen or a cotton swab cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid T Clean the dirt on the media shafts feed roller media sensor and ribbon roller using a cleaning pen or a cotton swab cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 243 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 8 Clean the bottom of the feed roller and media sensor assembly using the cotton cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid 9 You can remove the media sensor cover 63 to clean the surface easily Remove the thumbscrew 4 attached to the media sensor cover 10 To assemble the media sensor cover 8 make sure that you insert the tab of the media sensor cover to the slot as shown Then attach the media sensor cover using the thumbscrew 9 11 Tum the head lock lever
142. S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration PRESS ENTER KEY This screen reminds the user to press the 9 ENTER button to change or power off the printer to save the setting PRESS ENTER KEY TO CHANGE POWER OFF TO SAVE INTERFACE AUTO SELECT Enable or disable the interface auto detection ENABLE Automatically select the connected interface INTERFACE DISABLE The interface is selected based on the interface setting AUTO SELECT ENABLE RSs Note i The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again INTERFACE SETTING Set whether or not to perform the interface settings e YES Enter the PORT SELECT screen INTERFACE NO Enter the IGNORE CR LF screen SEITING PORT SELECT Select the port used for the connected interface DATA PORT For receiving various SBPL commands and executing PORT SELECT print operations e SUB PORT For monitoring the printer status and connecting to DATA PORT external devices SUB PORT 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 81 4 Operation and Configuration DATA PORT Select the connected interface for use with the data port The options are as follows e USB e LAN RS 232C IEEE1284 Bluetooth WLAN Note Bluetooth shows even if a Bluetooth adapter is not connected e WLAN shows only if a WLAN unit is installed You cannot select the interface that has already been set for the SUB PORT e he setting will be effective only if you power on the
143. SENSOR LEVEL Pressing the 5 button on each screen will revert to the SERVICE MODE setting screen i Select SENSOR LEVEL i 4 button I X button SENSOR LEVEL AUTO MANUAL Select AUTO Select MANUAL 4 button 1 button X button SENSOR SELECT SENSOR LEVEL MARK E X XV ADJUST LEVEL A 4 button i I X button i X button SENSOR LEVEL MARK R X XV When I MARK is selected When GAP is selected INSERT WHITE REMOVE LABEL AREA OF LABELS PLACE LINER UNDER SENSOR UNDER SENSOR PRESS ENTER KEY PRESS ENTER KEY ADJUST LEVEL fy 4 button X button SENSOR LEVEL I MARKR X XV Calibration succeed Calibration failed CALIBRATION CALIBRATION SLICE LEVEL M COMPLETE FAILED UON PRESS ENTER KEY PRESS ENTER KEY X button SENSOR LEVEL A button GAP E X XV ADJUST LEVEL CALIBRATION oe 4 button lt button EXIT CALIBRATION RETRY N X button Select EXIT UR m XV CALIBRATION sd aati ADJUST LEVEL BER 4 button X button SENSOR LEVEL GAP R X XV SLICE LEVEL RV lt button 120 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration SENSOR LEVEL Set the sensor adjustment method AUTO Automatically adjust the sensor level SENSOR LEVEL MANUAL Manually adjust the sensor level AUTO MANUAL SENSOR SELECT Select the media sensor type f
144. SNMP SET SELECT SNMP setting screen e SNMP TRAP SET Selects the trap number of SNMP When select it SNMP SETTING goes to SNMP trap setting screen SNMP TRAP SET Eu SNMP SETTING oelect community and authentication of SNMP SNMPv1 v2c 1 Goes to Community name screen SNMP SETTING SNMPv1 v2c 2 Goes to Community 2 name screen e SNMPv3 1 Goes to Authentication 1 user name screen SNMP v1 v2c 1 e SNMPv3 2 Goes to Authentication 2 user name screen SNMP v1 v2c 2 SNMP TRAP SET Select the trap number of SNMP from 1 to 3 TRAP 1 SNMP TRAP SET TRAP 2 TRAP TYPE SELECT Select SNMP trap type e SNMPv1 TRAP TYPE SELECT e SNMPv2c e SNMPv3 SNMPv 1 SNMPv2c Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 85 4 Operation and Configuration COMMUNITY NAME Input SNMP community name e When SNMPv1 v2c 1 is selected the default is public COMMUNITY NAME e When SNMPv1 v2c 2 is selected the default is none Note Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again COMMUNITY WRITE Enable or disable writing to MIB when accessing to community ENABLE Allows writing to MIB COMMUNITY WRITE DISABLE Does not allow writing to MIB ENABLE MINE 4 F Not
145. Section 4 2 12 Service Mode Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XX XXOOCXX XX XX P A Y A d Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Service mode Display Status Setting Information External signal Status Sensor level AUTO ONLINE FEED FEED ON ERROR Printer Configuration FUNCTION KEY Adjustment mode User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer 210 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual REPRINT W FEED CALENDER REPRINT FORWARD BACKFEED DISTANCE DEFAULT EXI 9PIN SELECT BACKFEED SPEED EURO CODE SELECT LANGUAGE PRIORITY SETTING RIBBON NEAR END LABEL RE DETECT SEI PASSWORD PASSWORD NO COMPATIBLE MODE COMPATIBLE MODE HEAD SIZE COMPATIBLE MODE DARKNESS COMPATIBLE MODE DARKNESS MODEL NO YES 000 0 255 DEFAULT MODE FAST D5 0 FF ENGLISH COMMAND ENABLE ENABLE OFF 1000 OFF NORMAL ENABLE M8485 a0 50 65Se 4 Operation and Configuration MEDIA LENGTH TRACE MODE SAVE PRINT LOG MEMORY SELECT OUTPUT PRINT LOG FROM SUBPORT RIBBON TENSION ADJUSTMENT THROUGHPUT FEED OFFSET BACKFEED OFFSET TOTAL QTY DISPLAY PLUG amp PLAY REGION CODE REPLY PERIOD ENG REPLY DELAY TIME FONT SELECT GB18030 FONT SELECT BIGS FONT SELECT KSX1001 HEAD SELECT S86 ex 0178 DISABLE DISABLE SD DISABLE 12 0 15 NORMAL ogg
146. Shows when the field intensity is between levels 2 and 3 and l l Not used il the printer is connected to an access point Shows when the field intensity is between levels 1 and 2 and l l Not used ll the printer is connected to an access point The meaning of this icon differs depending on the wireless LAN mode In Infrastructure mode Shows when the field intensity is less than level 1 and the printer is connected to an access point However it may be possible to communicate depending on the environment In Ad Hoc mode Always shows when the printer is not connected lal Sors wren no piner isro comentes toan aessss pat O Nusa e Bluetooth connection status C Description J EE Shows when Bluetooth is connected Shows when Bluetooth is disconnected 48 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration e Buzzer volume Mon scription O OOO ill Shows when the volume is level 3 Loud Shows when the volume is level 2 Medium Shows when the volume is level 1 Low Shows when the volume is level 0 Mute e Emulation mode Shows when SZPL emulation module is loaded SOPL Shows when SDPL emulation module is loaded FL a Shows when SIPL emulation module is loaded e Warning Icons Icon Description Shows when a ribbon near end is detected Shows when a label near end is detected Shows when a receive buffer near full is detected S84 ex S86 e
147. TION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card Press the W button Power On Screen messages are shown in English regardless of the setting value on the SELECT LANGUAGE screen INTERFACE SELECT INTERFACE SD CARD USB MEMORY Select INTERFACE A4 button Select SD CARD or USB MEMORY lt button ij its Waiting to receive data from the interface selected on the DOWNLOAD READY Download Font Logo TTF Program download lis FONT DOWNLOAD READY Indication of Indication of new entry overwriting iis iis RECEIVING DELETING RECEIVING VERIFYING S JE iis PROGRAM DOWNLOAD COMPLETED FONT REGISTRY COMPLETED DATA PORT screen of the interface mode Continue to show while receiving Font or Logo information 5 DELETING SC 3 FONT DELETE COMPLETED After 3 beeps the printer returns to the DOWNLOAD READY screen 184 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual DOWNLOAD SELECT F TRMWARE 2 BYTE FONTS 4 CONF IG FONT LOGO 4 button Download completed When downloading the printer VERIFYING XX XX configurations the an nii a skipped 3 short beeps isl when the download is PROGRAM DOWNLOAD completed COMPLETED 4 button 4
148. TMENT Adjust the ribbon tension for the backfeed if scuffing horizontal black line occurs The ribbon is tensed when using a smaller value and is loosened when RIBBON TENSION using a larger value ADJUSTMENT The setting range varies depending on the head density as follows Head Density Setting Range Default Value Note Shows only for the thermal transfer model THROUGHPUT Set the interval from backfeed to forward feed or from forward feed to backfeed THROUGHPUT FAST The interval is shortened and the throughput is improved NORMAL Use the existing interval FAST MORAN 4 k Note The printer may not operate with the FAST setting depending on the operating environment FEED OFFSET Set the feed distance in LINERLESS mode The setting range is from 000 to 250 mm FEED OFFSET Note Shows only if PRINTER TYPE in ADVANCED MODE is set to 000 mm LINERLESS S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 137 4 Operation and Configuration BACKFEED OFFSET Set the backfeed distance in LINERLESS mode The setting range is from 000 to 250 mm BACKFEED OFFSET Note Shows only if PRINTER TYPE in ADVANCED MODE is set to 000 mm LINERLESS oh m TOTAL QTY DISPLAY oet whether or not to show the total print quantity YES Shows the total print quantity and current print quantity TOTAL QTY NO Shows the current print quantity DISPLAY YES is selected NO is selected p LIE il H ONL INE ONL INE 000000 00000
149. To get the correct adjustment result close the media sensor assembly before performing the adjustment 11 Check the new GAP R value This is the High level High level value for the Gap sensor If the difference between the High and the Low level values is 1 0 V or more then the adjustment SENSOR LEVEL oad has satisfied the criteria GAP R If the difference between the High and the Low level values is less than 1 0 V repeat the procedure ADJUST LEVEL 090 from steps 3 through 11 Criteria for Adjustment Low level liner portion High level label portion Low level 12 Press the ENTER button to confirm the setting and proceed to slice level adjustment Screen Note If you are having difficulties in adjusting the sensor level properly clean the media sensor portion If the problem persists contact your SATO reseller or technical support center to replace the media sensor 13 Press the A buttons to change the SLICE LEVEL and then press the SENSOR LEVEL 41 ENTER button GAP R X XV The slice level can be set to 0 0 V or from 0 3 V to 2 9 V adjustable in increments of 0 1 V SLICE LEVEL ZV If you set the SLICE LEVEL to 0 0 V the printer sets the slice level automatically 262 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 5 4 Adjusting the Paper End Sensor This printer uses an I mark sensor to sense the Paper end error The checking
150. USNS Note 4k Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUS5 RECEIVE BUFFER Set the receive buffer type MULTI Multiple receive buffers RECEIVE BUFFER e 1ITEM A single receive buffer MULTI Note 1 ITEM Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUSA S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 105 4 Operation and Configuration IEEE1284 ACK SIGNAL Set the width of the IEEE1284 ACK signal The setting range is from 00 5 us to 12 0 us and is adjustable in 0 1 us steps EEE 1284 ACK SIGNAL Note US Shows only if the IEEE1284 interface is selected and RECEIVE BUFFER is set to 1ITEM 106 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Bluetooth Setting X button Authentication Level NONE Level 2 1 X button DISCOVERY SETTING md DISABLE 4 F 4 button E E E E o c X button Shows only PARAMETER when ENABLE SETTING ISI is selected nee 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the 2 button on each screen Will revert to the INTERFACE MODE menu PARAMETER SETTING PSI NEMINEM 0500 X button Mi X button PARAMETER SETTING PSW X button PROTOCOL STATUS3 STATUS4 X button CRC CHECK ENABLE MARJAA 4 k 4 button S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 107 4 Operation and Configuration AUTHENTI
151. a The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data reading progress m XX XX shows the file number being read and total number of files After reading the data it goes to the WRITING screen oe Lud WRITING XX XX UPLOAD The printer is writing the uploaded data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data writing progress XX XX shows the file number being written and total number of files ou XX XX 5L 0 JE 190 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration PROGRAM UPLOAD COMPLETED This screen shows the completion of the upload Three beeps will sound when the program upload is completed Press the lt ENTER button to return to the INTERFACE SELECT screen PROGRAM UPLOAD COMPLETED 4 2 21 Hidden Setting Mode This mode allows the operator access to set the label out sensor status and work shift mode status The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the hidden setting mode The table describes each setting screen in detail 4 A P Power on LABEL OUT SENSOR SHIFT CODE NO LABEL OUT SENSOR Enable or disable the paper end detection e YES Enable the paper end detection LABEL OUT SENSOR NO Disable the paper end detection YES NO SHIFT CODE Enable or disable the work shift setting mode YES Enable the work shift setting mode SHIFT CODE NO Disable the work shift setting mode Note 4 ok
152. a Sustainable World Display Status Interface mode SNMP SNMP Information External signal Status SNMP FUNCTION Sensor level PRINTER INFORMATION Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XXXXX XXX OCXX ENABLE Y Printer Configuration SATO 586 ex Adjustment mode NAME User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP LOCATION WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode CONTACT Advanced mode RFID mode ENGINE ID 399999990500199811D7682E5361746F Emulation mode System Others SNMP setting Restart Printer Community 1 COMMUNITY public WRITE DISABLE Community 2 COMMUNITY WRITE DISABLE SNMPv3 User 1 USER NAME AUTH PROTOCOL AUTH KEY PRIVACY PROTOCOL PRIVACY KEY WRITE SNMPv3 User 2 USER NAME AUTH PROTOCOL AUTH KEY PRIVACY PROTOCOL PRIVACY KEY WRITE 204 84 ex 8S86 ex Operator Manual NONE NONE DISABLE NONE NONE DISABLE Display Status Information External signal Status Sensor level Printer Configuration Adjustment mode User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer SNMP Trap setting Trap 1 FUNCTION TYPE SELECT COMMUNITY USER NAME AUTH PROTOCOL AUTH KEY PRIVACY PROTOCOL PRIVACY KEY IPv4 6 SELECT IP Address Trap 2 FUNCTION TYPE SELECT COMMUNITY USER NAME AUTH PROTOCOL AUTH KEY P
153. aintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller Is the platen roller damaged Replace the platen roller Does the interface operate correctly Check the interface according to the Interface Troubleshooting Is the data or signal sent from the computer Power on the device again incorrect Check the data sent from the computer and communication conditions Is the main CONT PCB defective Replace the main CONT PCB Contact a SATO reseller or technical service center for replacement 10 L 7 4 3 Can Feed the Media but Cannot Print No MWhttochek Countermeasure 1 Are the media and ribbon designed for use with Use the media and ribbon designed for the the printer printer Is the correct sensor type set oet a correct sensor type Is the print head installed correctly Install the print head correctly 4 Is the pressure of the print head too strong ortoo Adjust the pressure of the print head with the weak head pressure adjustment dial 5 Is the print head dirty or is there a label attached If the print head is dirty clean it using the to it cleaning pen If a label is attached to the print head remove it If the glue of label is attached to the print head clean it using a cleaning kit Do not clean using a hard object Doing so could cause damage to the print head For printer cleaning refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller 84 ex S86 ex Opera
154. al number of files After verifying the module data it goes to the MODULE DOWNLOAD COMPLETED screen Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to SD CARD or USB MEMORY 5 1 4 Emulation Module Error If error occurred during module loading or deleting process the screen shows the error massage MODULE ERROR and the cause of the error as listed below e READ DATA ERR e WRITE DATA ERR e VERIFY DATA ERR e WRONG HEADER e WRONG CHECKSUM When read data error write data error or verify data error occurred update the emulation loader firmware or change the FLASH ROM device When wrong header or wrong checksum error occurred delete the emulation module and then download the emulation module firmware again If error occurred during module downloading the screen shows the error massage DOWNLOAD DATA ERROR The possible causes of module download error are Module header error Not enough memory space or the module size is too big When the module download error occurred e Check the module header information Delete the old module Delete the unused module 5 Emulation Mode 5 VERIFYING XX XX C MODULE ERROR READ DATA ERR WRITE DATA ERR VERIFY DATA ERR WRONG HEADER alia DOWNLOAD DATA ERROR 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 229 5 Emulation Mode 52 SZPL Emulation Mode The SZPL Emulation Mode is available when the printer is loaded with SZPL Emulation firmware The RFID option is n
155. and adjustment procedures for the Paper end I mark sensor level are as follows 1 Go to the SENSOR LEVEL I MARK R setting screen of SERVICE MODE SENSOR LEVEL MARK R X XV ADJUST LEVEL BET First check the I MARK R value voltage of the Paper end I mark sensor when the liner is placed on the sensor 2 Open the top cover and unlock the media feed and media sensor assembly 3 Physically place the liner without the label resting over the l mark sensor 4 Press the media feed and media sensor assembly down to lock it To get the correct adjustment result close the media sensor assembly before performing the adjustment 5 Check if the I MARK HR value is 2 0 V or I MARK R level 2 0V lower If not change ADJUST LEVEL using the A V buttons until the I MARK R value is 2 0 V or lower SENSUR LEVEL m MARK R ADJUST LEVEL BET am S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 263 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments Next check the I MARK R value voltage of the Paper end l mark sensor when no media is placed on the sensor 6 Unlock the media feed and media sensor assembly v F Remove all the media from the media sensor 8 Press the media feed and media sensor assembly down to lock it To get the correct adjustment result close the media sensor assembly before performing the adjustment 9 Check if the new I MARK R value is 2 2 V i I MARK R vei 422V or higher
156. anual 45 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 3 5 2 Loading Media without Using Dispenser This section describes the procedure to just load the media without using the dispenser The routing path of the media is shown in the right picture When loading the media make sure that the print side is facing up Feed roller and media sensor 1 Refer to steps 1 through 6 of Section assembly 3 5 1 Loading Label with Dispenser to Media shaft load the media NS Media Media shaft E Turn the head lock lever counterclockwise to lock the print head Press the feed roller and media sensor assembly down until the feed lock latch is locked Push the media guide lightly against the outermost edge of the media Close the top cover o Ol After loading the media and ribbon perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly Refer to the Section 4 2 17 Test Print Mode for details on how to perform a test print N CAUTION When closing the top cover be careful not to pinch your fingers 46 S 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Operation and Configuration 41 Display and Operation The display of the printer varies depending on the following modes Normal mode refer to Section 4 1 1 Normal Mode Display and Icons e Setting mode menu refer to Section 4 1 2 Setting Mode Menu and Icons Error display refer to Section 4 1 3 Error Display and Icons e Setting display refer to Section 4
157. ap is output The setting range is from 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF Note Shows only if the SNTP function is enabled FINISH SETTING Confirm to complete the setting e YES Returns to the user mode screen NO Returns to the NOTICE FUNCTION screen to select an item 4 Operation and Configuration TRAP IPv4 ADR 00 000 000 000 Ak TRAP IPv6 ADR FINISH SETTING YES wW S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 91 4 Operation and Configuration USB Setting Press the 4 gt Aor W button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen X button Pressing the button on each screen Will revert to the INTERFACE MODE menu PROTOCOL STATUSA STATUSS 4 button Y m X button Shows only when ITEM NO CHECK STATUS is selected ENABLE JMELSIES 4 F I X button 1 BCC CHECK ENABLE MELSJNS 4 F I I I I I I I I I I of PROTOCOL Set the communication protocol STATUS4 When selected the printer will proceed to the IGNORE CR PROTOCOL LF screen STATUSS When selected the printer will proceed to the ITEM NO STATUS4 CHECK screen SELES ITEM NO CHECK Set the item number check function ENABLE Enable the item number check function ITEM NO CHECK e DISAB
158. ator Manual 323 8 Appendix 8 7 4 Replacing the Media Feed Roller You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn media feed roller 1 Make sure that the printer is in power off mode then disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet 2 Open the top cover N CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 3 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head N CAUTION e The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury Pull the feed lock latch to unlock the feed roller and media sensor assembly G The feed roller and media sensor assembly will flip open 5 Loosen the screw C until the bearing clamp is released Do not remove the screw Remove the bearing from the chassis and the shaft of the media feed roller Pull out the media feed roller from the printer and replace it with a new media feed roller 324 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 Insert the gear end of the new media feed roller fully into the printer s center frame 9 Place the bearing back to the chassis and the shaft of the media feed roller 10 Rotate the bearing clamp onto the bearing and attach it with the screw 9 8 75 Replacing the Fan Filter The fan filter prevents atmospheric debris from being dr
159. avoid decreasing the processing power and preventing the label from moving during pause The print head will be in the down position when a printing error occurs he accuracy of printing is 1 5 mm when the ribbon saver function is enabled Power off the printer when an error occurs on the ribbon saver to avoid abnormal printing e Scuffing may occur depending on the combination of the ribbon and label used Verify the combination before use and select an appropriate ribbon e When requiring two labels for one print data the ribbon saver function will not work on the second label e When the printer is powered on the print head will move to the reference position down position e Saver error message is shown on the screen when the print head cannot move to the reference position 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 10 2 Ribbon Saver Timing Charts Dispenser mode backfeed after print and pulse input Power ON 500 ms Ne Ko NN Label feed Print head in es the up position BE External signal g ed CREER PEE PER ees eee em PRIN ee E E p E eT PREND TYPE1 ooo Operation g MM eael justia Print 2nd label Normally the print head is in the down position during backfeed However the print head will be lifted up when the ribbon print position is not identified Dispenser mode backfeed before print and pulse input Power ON lt 100 ms Label feed pS Ny A Print head i
160. awn into the printer 1 Peel off the old fan filter from the rear of the printer 2 Clean the printer to remove any adhesive residue on the surface Note You can purchase a cleaning kit from a SATO reseller or technical service center 3 Remove the backing paper from the new fan filter and paste the fan filter over the fan exhaust holes S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 325 8 Appendix 0 8 Media Motion of the Printer Operation 8 8 1 Feed Motion When the pitch sensor is disabled media will be fed while pressing the FEED button When the pitch sensor is enabled one media will be fed according to the backfeed motion setting 8 8 2 Paper End When the I mark sensor level has changed to high for 15 mm 0 6 it will be considered as the paper end Detection of paper end error l mark sensor 25V level Paper End Detection in Feed Operation After the paper end is detected the printer stops the feed operation immediately and generates an error Media feed direction 326 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Paper End Detection in Print Motion Operation varies by the number of remaining print steps when the paper end occurs during print operation Media feed direction When the print content falls within the area from the print head position to 15 mm 0 6 less than the I mark sensor When the print content falls within this area Media feed direction After
161. bes each setting screen in detail Note This mode is enabled only if SHIFT CODE is set to YES in the hidden setting mode e You can set up to three shifts depending on the number of work shifts required in the field For example if two shifts are required set work shift number 1 and 2 2f ONLINE QTY 000000 Select EXIT MI buttons A button Press for 5 seconds I When SHIFT CODE is set to YES in the hidden setting mode SELECT SHIFT 2 3 EXIT 4 k Select other than EXIT 4 button I X button ENTER SHIFT TIME 4 00 i lt button X button i HOW MANY CHR 1 0 a i lt button l X button ENTER SHIFT NAME E ish SELECT SHIFT Select the work shift number to store the work shift setting You can select the work shift number from 1 to 3 SELECT SHIFT Noles 2 8 EXIT If you select EXIT and press the lt ENTER button the printer returns to the online screen 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 63 4 Operation and Configuration ENTER SHIFT TIME Set the printer start time in 24 hour format Press the lt gt buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to change the value ENTER SHIFT TIME Press the lt ENTER button to save the value and proceed to the next setting screen HOW MANY CHR oet the character size of the SHIFT NAME by specifying the number of characters Select the number of characters using the A V but
162. bility with the printer operation of existing models COMPATIBLE MODE OFF Disable the compatibility with the printer operation of existing models ON OFF 4 F Note For details on the compatible mode refer to Section 8 3 About Compatible Mode 132 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration COMPATIBLE MODE HEAD SIZE Set the head width for S86 ex series models The options vary depending on the head density Corresponding head width are as follows COMPATIBLE MODE HEAD SIZE Model Name Lan Head Width aS mm S86 ex 203 dpi 167 5 hea 586 ex 305 dpi Note e Shows for S86 ex series models only and if COMPATIBLE MODE is set to ON e Refer to Section 8 3 2 Compatible Mode Print Head Width only for S86 ex printer for details on the affected items COMPATIBLE MODE DARKNESS Enable or disable the system command Print Darkness lt E gt e ENABLE Enable you to execute the Print Darkness lt E gt COMPATIBLE MODE DISABLE Ignore the Print Darkness lt E gt DARKNESS mee DISABLE 4 F S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 133 4 Operation and Configuration PRINTER MODEL Select the printer model based on print darkness in compatible mode e M8485 90 60 65Se Triple the value for Print Darkness lt E gt and set it PRINTER MODEL th int dark dic E M8485 90 60 65Se Print Darkness value lt E gt The value converted as S84 M8459Se Print Darkness value lt F gt e S84 M8459Se Do
163. bled The above minimum media pitch sizes are valid only when the print position adjustment and offset adjustment are set to O mm The minimum media pitch size changes when the print position adjustment and offset adjustment are set to the value other than 0 mm S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 331 332 8 Appendix 8 10 Optional Ribbon Saver Ribbon saver is a function to save on ribbon consumption by moving the print head up and down This optional function is only available for the S84 ex thermal transfer printer if the ribbon saver kit is installed 8 10 1 Ribbon Saver Operation The figure below shows the print head position when printing with the ribbon saver function activated Base reference Ai B iC D A B c G CO 1 FS ABC Print head is moving upward Media feed direction Print head is in the up position Print head is moving downward Print head is in the down position Printing mode COOU ZT e Ribbon saver function works when You have selected TRANSFER in the ADVANCED MODE gt PRINT METHOD setting screen You have selected ENABLE in the ADVANCED MODE gt RIBBON SAVER setting screen Be sure to use dispenser mode when using the ribbon saver function The label is not fed normally when the dispenser is not used The print head is not lifted up during label feeding operation Forward feed The print head will be in the down position every time the printer is printing Start printing immediately to
164. button 4 button i Print data save QTY 000001 Data reception Hex dump print OFFLINE m QTY 000000 After issuing the media For internal buffer Hex dump g icon is shown when INTERNAL E printing and internal buffer data DATA is selected QTY 000000 printing the screen automatically Sg icon is shown when RECEIVE changes to normal mode after BUFFER is selected I I I l I I I I I l I L i issuing the media I 162 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual SELECT DUMP DATA Select the data for printing the hex dump RECEIVE DATA Print the hex dump of the received data e RECEIVE BUFFER Print the hex dump of the received print data one item INTERNAL DATA Print the setting values of the internal buffer e SEND BACK DATA Return the received data one item to the data port Note RECEIVE BUFFER and SEND BACK DATA cannot be selected if there is no received data HEX DUMP Set the print and save functions of the hex dump PRINT Only print the received data SAVE Save and print the received data HEX DUMP Set the print width of the hex dump NORMAL Print the received data with sixteen bytes in one line HALF Print the received data with eight bytes in one line 4 Operation and Configuration SELECT DUMP DATA RECEIVE DATA RECEIVE BUFFER INTERNAL DATA 4 SEND BACK DATA HEX DUMP PRINT SAVE 4 bk HEX DUMP NORMAL HALF 4
165. cement e Adjust the print darkness 8 Appendix S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 321 8 Appendix 8 7 3 Replacing the Pressure Roller You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn pressure roller 1 Make sure that the printer is in power off mode then disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet 2 Open the top cover N CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 3 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head N CAUTION e The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury 4 Push the pressure roller release tab up to release the pressure roller plate G 5 Loosen the screw C until the bearing clamp is released Do not remove the screw Remove the bearing from the chassis and the shaft of the pressure roller Pull out the pressure roller from the printer and replace it with a new pressure roller 322 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Insert the gear end of the pressure roller fully into the printer s center frame 9 Place the bearing back to the chassis and the shaft of the pressure roller 10 Rotate the bearing clamp onto the bearing and attach it with the screw 11 Push the center of the pressure roller plate to latch it in place 8 Appendix S84 ex S86 ex Oper
166. ch and native graphic F can be printed with 4 line terminator omitted 238 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode 54 SIPL Emulation Mode The SIPL Emulation Mode is available when the printer is loaded with SIPL Emulation firmware The RFID option is not supported in this emulation firmware The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the SIPL emulation firmware The table describes each setting screen in detail 79 t R PII button ONLINE QTY 000000 OFFLINE QTY 000000 Press the 4 gt Aor W button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the EMULATION MODE menu v 1X gt 2X buttons EMULATION MODE 26 e 7 T vl DAD button l FORMAT STORE NAA ENABLE 4 F 4 button X button X button FONT c20 PITCH FIXED PROP X button CODEPAGE 1252 4 button 4 button 4 button Shows only when the PASSWORD input is enabled S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 239 5 Emulation Mode FORMAT STORE Set whether to save the user format data registered at printing in the printer The options are as follows DISABLE Do not save the user format data registered at printing in the printer The user format data remains in the printer memory until the printer is powered off You need to register a user
167. ct the power cord from the AC outlet 2 Open the top cover N CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 318 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 3 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head CAUTION The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury 4 Remove the thumbscrew attached to the cover G on top of the print head assembly Remove the cover and place it aside 5 Pull the tab to remove the print head Support the print head with your hand when the print head is released 6 Pull out the print head and remove all the connectors from the defective print head F Connect the connectors to the new print head 8 Appendix S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 319 8 Appendix 8 Pull back and arrange the cables from the top of the print head assembly 9 Install the print head to the print head assembly Align the print head and press the print head upward until it is latched 10 Attach the cover back to the top of the print head assembly with the thumbscrew CAUTION When attaching the cover be careful not to pinch the wire After replacement e Set the print head selection Only for S86 ex printer with the firmware version later than 61 00 00 06 In SERVICE MODE pre
168. d Likewise an adjustment of the screw upward on either end reduces pressure on that side Before adjusting the media feed roller ensure the print head is properly positioned and balanced Required tools Phillips screwdriver Long nose pliers or wrench The adjustment procedure for the media feed roller balance is as follows 1 Open the top cover of the printer 2 Locate two screws on the top of the feed roller and media sensor assembly 2 Loosen the locknut underneath the screw on either side Adjust the relative screw to increase or decrease the pressure e Tighten the screw to increase the roller pressure Loosen the screw to decrease the roller pressure 5 Perform media feed to check the flow of the media The media must not meander 6 Adjust the same screw in step 4 again until the media feed without meandering T When the desired outcome is achieved hold the adjusted screw in position while tightening the relative locknut G 270 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual f Troubleshooting This chapter explains the errors that can occur on the printer and the displays for indicating the current status 7 1 When an Error Message Occurs When there is an error on the printer the error message will show on the screen The error message and the countermeasure message alternate every three seconds These screens can be switched using the A V buttons N CAUTION Where parts replacement is conc
169. d direction 9 250 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 3 5 Limitation on Base Reference Point Adjustment After adjusting the print position and stop position the distance between these two positions should not exceed one pitch size including liner of the media Refer to the figure and table below for the adjustment range of the distance between the print position and the stop position for options Stop position for options Print position Initial Initial V Initial distance LITER RN l l l J l ln a Min The range of the adjusted distance includes A m S the base reference point of two media ON d Pe l ME 3 75 mm 3 5mm 3 75 mm 3 75 mm 0 15 0 15 40 15 0 15 Adjusted distance Max Adjustment range of the distance between the print position and the stop position for options E Distance Adjusted Distance 75mm 03 0 3 150mm 06 0 6 225mm 09 0 9 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 251 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 64 Adjusting the Print Quality You can adjust the print quality by adjusting the print darkness and print speed 6 4 1 Adjustment of the Print Darkness The adjustment procedure for the print darkness is as follows Note You can fine tune the print darkness by setting the DARKNESS in the adjustments mode Refer to Section 4 2 5
170. direction e 270 Print the data with 270 degree counterclockwise rotation from media feed direction Note The LABEL SIZE ADJ screen shows if you press the lt ENTER button with 90 180 or 270 selected LABEL SIZE ADJ WIDTH opecify the width of the label for rotation The setting range varies depending on the model as follows LABEL SIZE ADJ Setting Range Default Value MEE EE NOTH ER CM Seed 000026 2 m memcmer mene ue fe Note Shows only if ROTATE LABEL is set to 90 180 or 270 158 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual LABEL SIZE ADJ HEIGHT Specify the height of the label for rotation The setting range varies depending on the model as follows Setting Range Default Value dot dot 984 ex 203 dpi 00000 20000 20000 984 ex 305 dpi 00000 18000 18000 00000 09992 09992 00000 14988 14988 S86 ex 203 dpi S86 ex 305 dpi Note Shows only if ROTATE LABEL is set to 90 180 or 270 Select whether or not to ignore the A1 command A1 command is to set the media size Refer to the Programming Reference for details of the command e YES Ignore the A1 command NO Proceed with the lt A1 gt command Note Shows only if ROTATE LABEL is set to 90 180 or 270 LCD POWER SAVING Specify a period of time to light off the LCD backlight when the printer is not operated The setting range is from 00 to 15 minutes Note This function is disabled if set to 00 th
171. e The options are as follows XOR FORMAT ATTRIBUTE TRANSPARENT OPAQUE INVERSE TRANSPARENT OPAQUE INVERSE PAUSE MODE Enable or disable the pause mode ENABLE Enable the pause mode The printer enters offline mode after PAUSE MODE every print job if priority setting is set to LCD It has the same effect as STX J DISABLE DISABLE Disable the pause mode EADE MAES S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 237 5 Emulation Mode SOP EMULATION Set the types of Start of Print SOP emulation The options are as follows AUTO Auto selection based on the value set in lt STX gt O command SOP EMULATION e DISABLED lt STX gt 0 command is ignored PROD 110 Offset will be set by minus 110 AUTO ALLEG 220 Offset will be set by minus 220 DISABLED PROD 250 Offset will be set by minus 250 PROD 110 ALLEG 220 PROD 250 Select the code page to be used for 1 byte characters from the list The options are as follows e CP 850 1 BYTE CODEPAGE CP 858 e CP 1252 CP 850 UTF 8 CP 858 CP 88591 CP 88592 CP 88595 CP 852 CP 88591 CP 88592 CP 88595 CP 852 Set the measurement unit Inch mm COMPATIBILITY TTF Set whether to allow the use of TrueType font compatible mode ENABLE Allow the use of TrueType fonts COMPATIBILITY DISABLE Do not allow the use of TrueType fonts TTF By enabling the TrueType font compatible mode the bold TrueType font ENABLE DREI will be printed in smaller pit
172. e Writing possible OID are sysContact sysName and sysLocation Input SNMP authentication user name Press the lt gt buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to USER NAME change the value B Press the lt ENTER button to save the value and proceed to the next setting screen Note Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 86 S 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration AUTH PROTOCOL select SNMP authentication protocol The options are as follows AUTH PROTOCOL NONE MD5 NONE e SHA 1 MD5 Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again AUTH KEY Input SNMP authentication key Input more than 8 characters for the authentication name Press the lt P buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to AUTH KEY change the value a Press the lt ENTER button to save the value and proceed to the next setting screen Note e When the authentication name is less than 8 characters there will be buzzer sounds and it will not move to the next screen Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PRIVACY PROTOCOL Select SNMP privacy protocol The optio
173. e LCD backlight will remain on For details refer to Section 8 4 LCD Power Saving Mode 4 Operation and Configuration LABEL SIZE ADJ HEIGHT MUUUU GNORE A1 LCD POWER SAVING V9 MIN S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 159 4 Operation and Configuration LED INDICATION Set the LED indicator for indicating the printer status e ON The LED indicator lights flashes or off according to the printer LED INDICATION status OFF The LED indicator is always off ON ERROR INDICATION Set the LCD backlight for indicating a printer error NONE No change to the LCD backlight ERROR INDICATION e ON The LCD backlight lights orange BLINKS The LCD backlight flashes orange 160 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 14 Hex Dump Mode The hex dump mode allows you to print the contents of the receive buffer in a hexadecimal format to allow the data stream to be examined for errors and troubleshooting The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the hex dump mode The table describes each setting screen in detail CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card Press the 4 gt A or VW button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are
174. e media sensor is not set print head correctly Te OPEN HEAD The media has jammed Remove the jammed amp SET MEDIA media The media sensor is The media sensor is dirty Clean the media sensor the media sensor The cable of the media Connect the cable of the the cable of the sensor is disconnected media sensor media sensor correctly Ribbon end Flashes red The ribbon is not loaded ribbon is not loaded Load a new ribbon E mm Three short beeps The ribbon is damaged ribbon is The ribbon is damaged RIBBON END The ribbon is not loaded Load the ribbon correctly the ribbon correctly To clear the error correctly ed close the The ribbon is torn Clean and adjust the E p ribbon path PLEASE OPEN HEAD amp SET RIBBON Sensor error Lights red The media sensor level is Adjust the media sensor _ the media sensor a incorrect leve Lj 10 SEES NOORES Thesensortypeis sensor type is Use the correct sensor __ the correct sensor SENSOR ERROR i To clear the error Open and close the Meandering media Clean and adjust the print head media path S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 273 7 Troubleshooting Error No Message LED Buzzer Cause Countermeasure Print head error Lights red The print elements are Change print head check print head check re worn out conditions to only check A One long beep for missing elements in HEAD ERROR barcodes and
175. e test print of the site survey 196 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 01 123456 01 18 02 789ABC 10 25 03 AAAAAA 08 26 04 393939 08 45 05 987654 12 52 NOT FOUND AP AP PRINT SIZE LARGE SMALL AP PRINT PRESS ENTER KEY 4 Operation and Configuration AP PRINT PRINTING The test print of the site survey is in progress Note In site survey mode the printer prints only one label After the print AP PRINT completion or error release the printer returns to the list screen PRINTING S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 197 4 Operation and Configuration 43 Web Configuration The printer can be operated through a web configuration page using any browser With an Ethernet LAN or WLAN connection users can remotely get information from the printer or perform the printer configuration You need the printer IP address to access the web configuration page Refer to Section 4 2 16 Information Mode for the printer IP address If the printer IP address is 192 168 143 123 open up browser and enter the following URL 192 168 143 123 When a security certificate is prompted you must acknowledge and click Continue The web configuration page will be shown as follows On the upper right of each page the model name current resolution and MAC address are shown Display Status section shows specific information or status of the printer while Printer Configuration section allows users to perform adjustments and other prin
176. e the slotted screw driver to turn the adjustment dial Set the pressure balance according to the media width and media thickness 0 05 to 0 20 mm 0 20 to 0 31 mm Media Thickness 0 002 to 0 0079 0 0079 to 0 30122 Thin paper normal label etc Thick paper tag etc S84 ex 30 to 128 mm 10 to 30 mm 30 to 128 mm 10 to lt 30 mm 1 18 to 5 04 0 39 to lt 1 18 1 18 to 5 04 0 39 to lt 1 18 Media Width S86 ex 80 to 177 mm 51 to 80 mm 80 to 177 mm 51 to 80 mm 3 15 to 6 97 2 01 to lt 3 15 3 15 to 6 97 2 01 to lt 3 15 Pressure Balance Adjustment Dial oo Note The factory default setting is e The thickness of the media includes the liner 266 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 7 Adjusting the Head Position 6 7 1 Left Right Pressure Balance Setting Required tool Phillips screwdriver The adjustment procedure for the pressure balance is as follows 1 2 3 4 Note If the printer orientation is opposite from the photo the adjustment direction is reversed 6 Open the top cover of the printer Make sure that the head lock lever is in the lock position If it is not locked turn the head lock lever counterclockwise to lock the print head Locate the adjust collar on the side of the print head assembly Loosen the screw attached to the adjust collar Do not remove t
177. ed The space in the memory Delete unwanted data unwanted data uM is not sufficient from the memory One long beep To clear the error Power off the printer 1 PLEASE DELETE UNNECESSARY DATA Download data Lights red The downloaded data is Check the downloaded error incorrect data One long beep The download area is not Check the downloaded Ea 14 sufficient data size DOWNLOAD DATA ERROR Flashes red The BCC code of the data Check the data to be sent to be sent one item is and the communication Three short beeps incorrect settings To clear the error Ml LINE button Continue Press the Pll LINE printing from the print data button or cancel the where the BCC error F o PLEASE CHECK print job occurred SEND DATA Send the SUB command Clear the BCC error and continue printing from where it stopped Item No error Flashes red Sequence number of print Check the data to be sent T data one item is not and the communication EE m Three short beeps increased by one settings TEM NO ERROR To clear the error The sequence number is gt Il LINE button Continue Press the PII LINE not in sequential order printing from the print data E E button or cancel the where the Item No error O PLEASE CHECK print job occurred SEND DATA Send the SUB command Clear the Item No error and continue printing from where it stopped S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 275 7 Troubleshooting Error
178. ed View S84 ex printer ccccccseeccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeesaaeeeees 23 2 2 4 Top View S84 ex Printer kosis E EA 24 2 2 5 Media Dispensed View S86 ex printer 25 2 2 0 Top View 596 6X DIIHIOE accaoeeexu tcu harena oa REENE opener uso eM LM LU Rus Due mne 26 2 3 Installing the Printer onto a Support Structure Applicator 27 2 4 Checking the Bundled Accessories eese 28 2 5 Connecting the Interface Cable ccce eeee ee eeeee rne 29 2 5 1 Avallable Interfaces dousdonoes ob Da dr ees Even saa a dv d Peu eto ui eu lo Qaa v uc E E RR 29 25 MEH ACE COMMECHONS asmssccas eoeris pets ted cron did ita eedem rc pit Cu ette te o qd tothcieiede 29 2 5 0 INIEMAGCS Se MIB be NE m LE 30 2 54 Inmterrace CorbihallODi sasscaex aci ocuta scie a Mb atro dev uisa tUe dU PvR s cha a 31 2 6 Connecting the Power Cord 1 ee ee Lceee ee Lreee reinen nene a nena naar 32 2 4 FOWerF On OIf the PEITIIGE uci vese orbc cia p var aacra rcua oux d 2wE a UEu Vea uu O o cava vi ave Ex ce GS 33 2 154 Power onte PIDE siepe DUERME DRESS S DEDUuu lul cH E enu cA uento nM p cien aede Nadu 33 27 23 POWer OIT The TIMED usen distet ees ioedistedidazcelcetali sd tr tatetec antt eil pma toac ca en uetus 33 2 8 Installing Optional Memory Storage cese esee 34 2 8
179. ed in the file the printer goes to the SET START NUMBER screen When sequential data are not included in the file the printer goes to the OUTPUT LABEL screen SET START NUMBER This is the edit screen of the sequential data included in the read data Move the cursor using the lt P buttons change the value using the A V buttons and then press the 1 ENTER button SET START NUMBER The X X in the screen shows the currently edited sequential data number X X DIGIT 01 and total sequential data number 0000000000000001 DIGIT is the digit number of the selected cursor The screen may be decimal or hexadecimal according to the read data The maximum number of DIGIT is 99 Note Shows only when there is sequential data OUTPUT LABEL This screen allows you to specify the print number Move the cursor using the lt P buttons change the value using the A V buttons and then press the lt 4 ENTER button OUTPUT LABEL QTY 00000 Ak 68 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 8 Setting Mode Menu In the settings mode menu the setting modes are shown as follows ee cence node Access the settings related to the media sensor adjustment and various functions activation ot Advanced mode Access the settings related to the advanced printer configurations r Hex dump mode Access and print the hex dump for troubleshooting RFID Access the settings related to the optional RFID module RFID user
180. eed to slice level adjustment screen Note If you are having difficulties in adjusting the sensor level properly clean the media sensor portion If the problem persists contact your SATO reseller or technical support center to replace the media sensor 14 Press the A V buttons to change the SLICE LEVEL and then press the SENSOR LEVEL 3 ENTER button MARK R X XV The slice level can be set to 0 0 V or from 0 3 V to 2 9 V adjustable in increments of 0 1 V If you set the SLICE LEVEL to 0 0 V the printer sets the slice level automatically SLICE LEVEL Bv 15 If you completed with l mark sensor level adjustment press the 5 FUNCTION button to return to the SERVICE MODE menu Otherwise continue with the Gap sensor level adjustment Proceed to step 2 of Section 6 5 3 Adjusting the Gap Sensor Level Manually 260 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 5 3 Adjusting the Gap Sensor Level Manually The adjustment procedure for the Gap sensor level is as follows 1 Continue the procedure from step 15 of Section 6 5 2 Adjusting the I mark Sensor Level Manually If you only want to adjust the Gap sensor level after selecting MANUAL in SENSOR LEVEL screen press ENTER button repeatedly until SENSOR LEVEL GAP E screen is shown 2 On the SENSOR LEVEL GAP E screen press the A buttons to set ADJUST SENSOR LEVEL LEVEL to 2 and then press the 4 ENTER GAP E X XV but
181. eferring to the S84 ex UHF Inlay Placement amp Configuration Table in the S84 ex UHF RFID Configuration Guide READ POWER The measurement unit is in dBm and it is adjustable with 0 1 dBm The value converted to milliwatts mW is shown on the left 10mW FOO dBm The setting range differs according to the mounted RFID module The setting range is from 0 0 to 24 0 dBm Enable or disable the Multi vendor Chip based Serialization ENABLE Enable the Multi vendor Chip based Serialization MCS ENABLE MARYE 4 F e DISABLE Disable the Multi vendor Chip based Serialization Enable or disable the log function to record the RFID data The log data can record up to100 tags of information LOG ENABLE Enable the log function to record the RFID data DISABLE Disable the log function to record the RFID data ENABLE NES VES 4 k LOG Data Set the data to be recorded in the log when LOG is enabled e EPC and TID Store the EPC and TID data LOG DATA EPC Store the EPC data TID Store the TID data and TID Pre Encoded Tag Enable or disable the pre encoded tag ENABLE Enable the pre encoded tag Pre Encoded lag DISABLE Disable the pre encoded tag ENABLE MINNS 4 F 172 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Chip Manufacture set the chip manufacturer of the RFID tag e IMPINJ ALIEN e NXP MCS Prefix Set the MCS prefix insert method AUTO Set to the manufacturer prefix selected in Chip Manufacturer
182. ekiau 364 8 13 6 Bl etoOlli Ine ACE usado eod aeuu a ez Set eee sean aenea A E dd terme er LO TEA 3 5 8139 7 Wireless LAN TCI ACC xcs ahr acted E tona eiue diecut a enhn Quit 3 6 6 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Before You Start Thank you for purchasing this SATO S84 ex S86 ex print engine hereafter referred to as the printer This manual supplies basic information on how to operate the printer Read the manual carefully to understand each function before operation Features of the Product This SATO S84 ex S86 ex print engine is a high performance automated print apply labeling system with a user friendly design and equipped with versatile functions This print engine has a durable design for non stop operation The main features of the printer are as follows e Equipped with a two color backlight LCD and a two color status LED for improved monitoring of the printer status Durable design for harsh environment High speed throughput printing with maximum 16 ips print speed and adjustable backfeed speed control Print head can be replaced easily without using extra tools New designed sensor cover with nonstick surface that can be easily removed and cleaned without any tools Easily upload download data to from an SD card or USB memory or by using the SATO All In One Tool application e Supports remote printer setting through the SATO All In One Tool application or a web browser e Supports a multi lan
183. emory space in the printer The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for deleting the emulation module The table describes each setting screen in detail Return to MODULE 1 SETTING screen when all the emulation modules are deleted Select DELETE X button 1 button MODULE DELETE SZPL XX XXX 4 button ALL MODULE DELETING SL FE MODULE DELETE COMPLETED 3 beeps MODULE DELETE Select the module to be deleted using the A V buttons and then press the lt ENTER button MODULE DELETE ALL Delete all the downloaded emulation firmware ALL SZPL XX XXX Delete the downloaded SZPL emulation firmware SZPL XX XXX SDPL XX XXX Delete the downloaded SDPL emulation firmware SIPL XX XXX Delete the downloaded SIPL emulation firmware Note The XX XXX is the module version information 224 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode ALL MODULE DELETING The printer is deleting the selected emulation module The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the module deletion If ALL is selected in the previous screen ALL MODULE is shown ALL MODULE Otherwise the screen shows the selected emulation module name For example SZPL XX XXX or SDPL XX XXX The XX XXX is the module version information MODULE DELETE COMPLETED This screen shows the completion of deleting the selected emulation module and three beeps will sound If there is em
184. en CUSTOM is selected in CTRL CODE TYPE SOH USER CODE X button USER CODE SIX 4 button l I I l l I l I I X button l USER CODE CR I I l I i 4 button X button USER CODE CNTBY 4 button I lc Press the 4 gt Aor W button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the EMULATION MODE menu LABEL ROTATION ENABLE DERYA i n 4 F i 4 button X button FORMAT ATTRIBUTE TRANSPARENT OPAQUE INVERSE i 4 button X button PAUSE MODE ENABLE MESMINS 4 F i 4 button X button SOP EMULATION AUTO DISABLED PROD 110 ALLEG 220 4 button ew ew ww ww ew c ew ew I S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 button X button MEASURE UNIT Inch mm 4 button X button COMPATIBILITY TIF ENABLE MIESINS 4 F 4 button EMULATION MODE 26 b 7 T FO Fal 235 5 Emulation Mode CTRL CODE TYPE Set the control code type The options are as follows e STANDARD CTRL CODE TYPE ALTERNATE 1 ALTERNATE 2 ST ANDARD CUSTOM ALTERNATE 1 ALTERNATE 2 STANDARD ALTERNATE 1 and ALTERNATE 2 have control codes CUSTOM preset User can set the val
185. en the printer paused due to MAX ERR COUNT number of retries exceeding RFID LABEL DATA The options are as follows e RELEASE When an RFID tag error occurs the printer discards the RELEASE PAPY current writing data and failed label The RFID error screen shows and it continues to print the next data If the RFID error occurs continuously and reaches the specified MAX ERR COUNT printing pauses Press the Pll LINE button to discard the current writing data and continues to the next print Press the FEED button to discard the all data of the current item and continues to the next item printing Press the X CANCEL button to discard all the item data including the current data RETRY When an RFID tag error occurs the printer attempts to write the same data based on the specified MAX ERR COUNT If the tag error continues an error message is shown and the printer pauses Press the Il LINE button to print again Press the i FEED button to discard the data of the current item and continues to the next item printing Press the X CANCEL button to discard all the item data including the current data If the external signal is enabled and MAX ERR COUNT is set to 0 the printer does not display the error message nor pause at tag error with both RETRY RELEASE and continues printing with the external signal MAX ERR COUNT oet the number of retries release reprint at the RFID tag error The count starts after the RFID tag erro
186. eps To clear the error Press the Pll LINE button Flashes red Three short beeps To clear the error Press the Pl LINE button or cancel the print job Flashes blue and red alternately Three short beeps To clear the error Power off the printer The temperature of the printer has exceeded its tolerance value Incorrect command or parameter in the print data Caaa position of error occurrence lt bb gt error command name cc error code The CRC code of the data to be sent one item is incorrect No wireless LAN unit is connected while the printer is in wireless LAN download mode The printer failed to connect to the wireless LAN unit 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting Stop the operation of the the operation of the printer to let the temperature decrease Check the print data Refer to Section 7 1 1 More Information about Command Error for details Check the data to be sent and the communication settings Ml LINE button Continue printing from the print data where the CRC error occurred send the SUB command Clear the CRC error and continue printing from where it stopped Make sure that the wireless LAN unit is connected correctly Change the wireless LAN unit When you change the wireless LAN the data port and sub port in the communication settings change depending on the settings 2 1 7 Troubleshooting Error N
187. er Bluetooth Wireless Communication Compliance Statement This product has been certified for compliance with the relevant radio interference regulations of your country or region To make sure continued compliance do not Disassemble or modify this product e Remove the certificate label serial number seal affixed to this product Use of this product near microwave and or other wireless LAN equipment or where static electricity or radio interference is present may shorten the communication distance or even disable communication 12 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Before You Start Industry Canada IC Statement for Bluetooth This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause interference his device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS 102 of the IC radio frequency RF Exposure rules This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person s body excluding extremities hands wrists feet and ankles Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes e L appareil
188. erned contact your SATO reseller or technical support center to perform internal inspections and repairs The error message its cause and the countermeasures are as follows No Message LED Buzzer Machine error Lights red Defective circuit board Replace the main Replace the main CONT TT PCB ie tu One long beep MACHINE ERROR To clear the error Power off the printer PLEASE CONTACT SUPPORT CENTER Flash ROM error Lights red Flash ROM is not Replace the main CONT TT accessible PCB nor 05 One long beep Number of write has been ROM ERROR exceeded To clear the error Power off the printer du PLEASE CONTACT SUPPORT CENTER S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 271 7 Troubleshooting Error No Message LED Buzzer Cause Countermeasure Parity error Flashes blue and red RS 232C settings are Adjust the interface the interface alternately incorrect settings correctly The cable connection is Check and connect the Three short beeps i incorrect cable correctly To clear the error Power off the printer PLEASE MATCH I F SETTING WITH PC Flashes blue and red RS 232C settings are Adjust the interface alternately incorrect settings correctly The cable connection is Check and connect the incorrect cable correctly El Fii OVERRUN ERROR Three short beeps To clear the error Power off the printer zm BE PLEASE MATCH I F SETTING WITH PC Framin
189. et Place the printer on a stable area Place the printer on a stable area Do not S place the printer on an unstable table slanted surface or an area subject to strong vibration If the printer falls off or topples it could cause injury to someone Do not place containers filled with liquid on the printer Do not place flower vases cups or other containers filled with liquids on the printer If any liquid spills into the printer immediately power off the printer and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Then contact your SATO reseller or technical support center If you operate the printer in this condition it could cause a fire or electric shock 8 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Do not place objects into the printer Do not place metal or flammable objects S inside the printer s opening If a foreign object gets into the printer immediately power off the printer and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Then contact your SATO reseller or technical support center If you operate the printer in this condition it could cause a fire or electric shock Do not use other than the specified voltage Do not use other than the specified S voltage AC 100 V 240 V Doing so could cause a fire or electric shock Always ground connections e Always connect the printer s ground wire to a ground Not grounding the ground wire could cause an electric shock Handling the power cord Do not brea
190. etault Setting elo RR ER TE RT HE 299 eM BUEOEST e e M MOC MN OT RO 300 9 1 11 Hidden Setting MOS ccs aree ti ban dead maak ai a Seale Suv Saepe 301 8 1 12 Work Shift Setting Mode cccccccccseeccccceeeceeeeeeeceeeeseeeceeeeeeeseesseeeeessseeeseeseaeeess 301 8 1 13 Simple Standalone ModE einser e A nennen enne nnns 302 8 1 14 Wireless LAN Settlfig eiie teda ede Erde to sett reo tis tio Laut o dus Fra Eebe cor Reee Deu tu cod 302 8 2 Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions 306 8 3 About Compatible Mode 11 eee Leeee ee Leeeeen leeren enne nnn nenas 308 9 9 T Compatible MOGG 64 oot a eem us toan utum Via oe al ccs 308 8 3 2 Compatible Mode Print Head Width only for S86 ex printer 309 8 3 3 Print Head Width and Printable Area Range cccccecsseeeeceeseeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeees 311 8 4 LCD Power Saving MOGOPS crues deco nis erus aaa a aaa a exe san in ccu ned usa cats 313 8 5 Input Output Signal of the External Signal 314 8 6 NOUPCATION FUNCTION e cect ccieeetedenesenccseuctst ciety coats Secardectneesnmeesencentaesisty 316 8 7 Replacing Consumable Parts ccecccesseesesseeccesseeeeesseeeenseeesenseeseenseesaes 318 8 7A Replacing the Pint ICA Ge snckcsoy sears iecore ao c IM peecean ette abest sincera OEE 318 8 7 2 Replacing the Platen Roller
191. ference point for printing Base reference point for printing S86 ex 168 0 LU 168 0 mm S06 ex 203dpi i 203dpi M8460Se is M8460Se compatible 7 compatible M8485Se YE M8485Se compatible 7 compatible M8460Se Ys M8460Se C ee O ae B M8485Se 7 M8485Se 5 Y S86ex te S86 ex 305dpi Ly 305dpi M8 amp 465Se 7 M8465Se g compatible compatible M8465Se i M8465Se T M8485Se compatible Z M8485Se compatible i 41280mm di 128 0 mm Printable width 5 Printable width M846xSe compatible ZZ M846xSecompatible 152 0 mm 5 152 0 mm Printable width me Printable width wrrr Ix EREEEEEECU TT RU lt lt lt i 167 5 mm EZ 167 5 mm Print head width and printable width MBA60Se MBAG5Se MB485Se Print Head Density PrintHead Printable PrintHead Printable PrintHead Printable Width Width Width Width Width i 8 dots mm 203 dpi 168 mm 167 5 mm 152 mm 152 mm 128 mm 6 61 6 59 5 98 5 98 12 dots mm 305 dpi 167 9 mm 167 5mm 154 7 mm 152 mm 6 61 6 59 6 09 5 98 584 ex 886 ex Operator Manual 311 8 Appendix S84 ex Americas Opposite Left Hand Europe Asia Right Hand printer Printable area S84 ex 112 0 mm 203dpi 112 0 mm c S8408 eee ELLE b ei eag Q o D S84 ex D 305dpi wl FF EE EEE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE PEE EE O D 8412 Ce S S8Lex 609dpi 8424 Printable width
192. g error Flashes blue and red RS 232C settings are Adjust the interface alternately incorrect settings correctly st Th hort b The cable connection is Check and connect the FRAMING ERROR ree short Deeps incorrect cable correctly To clear the error Power off the printer zm hid PLEASE MATCH I F SETTING WITH PC Buffer overflow Flashes blue andred The size of the received Do not send data that alternately data exceeds the size of exceeds the size of the ES E the receive buffer receive buffer BUFFER OVER Three short beeps The communication Set the communication settings between the between the printer and To clear the error l printer and the host are the host correctly Power off the printer H ae Incorrect PLEASE CHECK SEND DATA 2 2 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting Error No Message LED Buzzer Cause Countermeasure Head open Flashes red The print head is Lock the print head the print head 1 VR unlocked Replace the sensor for sensing the open close status of the print head Three short beeps The sensor for sensing the open close status of goat Me er the print head is defective Close the print head Flashes red The media is not loaded Load the media correctly Three short beeps The media is not loaded correctly To clear the error The sensitivity of the Adjust the sensor level Open and close th
193. g range is from A to Z and a to z The default value is A JANUARY B FEBRUARY C MARCH D APRIL CALENDAR E MAY F JUNE G JULY H AUGUST J SEPTEMBER K OCTOBER MONTH CODE L NOVEMBER M DECEMBER JANUARY Select the month using the A V buttons select the month code using iz the lt P buttons then press the lt 4 ENTER button to confirm the month code Note Shows only if YES is selected in the SET CALENDAR screen CALENDAR CASE FORMAT Select the character format for the calendar MIXED Use upper case for the first character only CALENDAR e UPPER Use upper case for all characters CASE FORMAT MIXED UPPER Note 4k Shows only if YES is selected in the SET CALENDAR screen CALENDAR CHECK Enable or disable the calendar check function ENABLE Enable the calendar check function CALENDAR CHECK DISABLE Disable the calendar check function ENABLE DARJA is Note 4k Shows only if YES is selected in the SET CALENDAR screen CHARACTER PITCH Set the character width for printing PROPORTIONAL Print each character with a different width n FIXED Print all characters with the same width PROPORTIONAL FIXED 156 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual PROTOCOL CODE Set the protocol code e STANDARD Use a standard code e NON STANDARD Use a non standard code Note To set the non standard code send the user download command lt LD gt in normal mode For more details on the lt LD gt command refer
194. g the 2 button on each screen will revert to the INTERFACE MODE menu Select READY BUSY or XON XOFF lt 1 button I l i e n E S E E I I l i I 1 Select STATUS2 i l STATUS3 or STATUS4 i 4 button i Select STATUSS 1 I 4 button l I Emm umo m emo ee oom l en pee i iX button ees ITEM NO CHECK when STATUSS RECEIVE BUFFER ee is selected MULTI ENABLE 0 Sab E or XON XOFF is selected l X button BCC CHECK ENABLE MEINE 4 F 100 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration BAUDRATE Set the RS 232C baud rate The following baud rates are available 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps S BAUDRATE 2400 X 4800 9600 PU 38400 5 600 115200 bps 115200 Note e Shows only if the RS 232C interface is selected e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again PARITY BIT oet the RS 232C parity bit The following options are available NONE PARITY BIT e ODD EVEN NONE ODD Note e Shows only if the RS 232C interface is selected e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again STOP BIT Set the RS 232C stop bit The following options are available 1BIT STOP BIT en 1BIT 2BIT Note e Shows only if the RS 232C interface is selected e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 101
195. guage display menu and printing of Asian fonts e Supports emulations in standard firmware e Supports various communication interfaces e Supports SNTP protocol 984 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Before You Start Safety Precautions This section describes how to safely operate the printer Be sure to read and understand all instructions carefully before you install and use the printer Pictographic Symbols This operator manual and printer labels use a variety of pictographic symbols These symbols show the safe and correct operation of the printer and how to prevent injury to others and property damage The symbol explanations are as follows Caution The Warning symbol indicates that you can cause death or serious The Caution symbol indicates that you can cause injury or property damage if you do not follow the instruction or procedure injury if you do not follow the instruction or procedure Example Pictographs The A pictograph means Caution is required The pictograph includes a specified warning symbol for example the left symbol shows electric shock The G pictograph means Must not be done The pictograph includes a specified prohibited symbol for example the left symbol means Disassembly prohibited A The pictograph means Must be done The pictograph includes a specified mandate action symbol for example the left symbol means Disconnect the power plug from the outl
196. he dump data will be a maximum of sixteen bytes in HEX Sixteen bits character codes such as Kanji are not supported When the media size is not specified with the lt A1 gt command the error message and slash are printed in a small layout as shown below since the origin to be referenced is not clear WRITE TAG ERROR in RFID write READ TAG ERROR in tag data command print command TU WRITE TAG READ TAG ERROR lt D 4330313233353637 D 38394 14243444546 T a e D 2 zi 2 TAG NOT FOUND error in RFID TAG NOT FOUND error in tag write command data print command TU INVENTORY CHECK is enabled i TAG NOT TAG NOT FOUND lt 2 3031323334353637 D 3839414243444546 T a 2 D 2 2 Dump data in HEX for the first sixteen bytes of the write data or the maximum thirty two characters in ASCII The dump data will be in HEX when non printable characters and control characters are included in the data 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 341 8 Appendix The types of errors to print are as follows Cause and Countermeasure TAG NOT FOUND Did not find the tag to print or failed to read the tag Countermeasure Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer antenna configuration WRITE TAG ERROR Failed to write the tag Countermeasure Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer antenna configuration VERIFY ERROR The written value and the read value do not match Countermeasure Confirm t
197. he inlay operation and check the printer antenna configuration LOCKING ERROR Failed to lock the tag en O the media MULTI TAGS ERROR Cause Multiple tags captured at a time tags captured at a time Countermeasure Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer antenna configuration CHIP MAKER ERR Cause Specified tag chip manufacturer is not correct when specifying in MCS setting and encoding SGTIN96 Countermeasure Check the media and correct the tag chip manufacturer MCS NOT SUPPORT Cause Unsupported inlay IC chip is used when specifying the MCS setting and encoding SGTIN96 Countermeasure Check the media and change it with supported inlay HEAD ONLY ERROR Succeeded to read but failed to write the tag Countermeasure Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer antenna configuration 342 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 11 2 RFID Error and Reset Timing Error signal output with one shot pulse Read Write error RFID tag error output NENNEN 100 500 ms Error signal output with long pulse Read Write error 4 RFID tag error output Print end Print done Type I ee ee When the reprint count reaches the specified number the RFID tag error and Machine error are output at a time The machine error output is always a long pulse 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 343 8 Appendix Timing chart of error signal output with one shot pulse ltem RF
198. he screw Rotate the adjust collar to adjust the head pressure balance Rotate the adjust collar counterclockwise to increase the head pressure on the frame side Rotate the adjust collar clockwise to increase the head pressure on the opposite side Hold the adjust collar in the set position and tighten the screw S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 26 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 7 2 Front Rear Head Alignment Required tools Phillips screwdriver e Slotted screwdriver The adjustment procedure for the head alignment is as follows 1 Open the top cover of the printer 2 Make sure that the head lock lever is in the lock position If it is not locked turn the head lock lever counterclockwise to lock the print head 3 Locate two screws from the front of the print head assembly 4 Loosen two screws using the Phillips screwdriver Do not remove the screws 5 Insert the slotted screwdriver into the regulation apertures on the left and right sides Adjust the head position by turning the slotted screwdriver in the relevant direction Direction A Print head position moves forward Direction B Print head position moves backward 6 Tighten two screws 268 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 68 Adjusting the Ribbon Tension Balance If the ribbon is not spread smoothly over the print head print voids will occur at the point
199. head Refer to Section 8 7 1 Replacing the Print Head for details Replace the platen roller Refer to Section 8 7 2 Replacing the Platen Roller for details 7 Troubleshooting 7 3 When the LED Lights Red Blue The LED will light or flash to show the current status of the printer The status when the LED lights or flashes is as follows Printer Status Light off The power is off or the printer is in Power on the printer or change it to offline mode online mode Lights blue The printer is in online mode You can operate the printer Lights red An error has occurred Clear the error according to the Flashes red message Flashes blue and red alternately S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 283 7 Troubleshooting 7 4 Troubleshooting Table Check the items below when the printer does not operate correctly N WARNING Do not touch the power switch connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands are wet Doing so could cause an electric shock Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you perform the cleaning Note You can purchase a cleaning kit or cleaning sheet from a SATO reseller or technical service center 7 4 4 No Power Nothing on the Screen No Whatochek Countermeasure 1 Is the power cord fully connected to the AC Connect the power cord to the AC outlet fully outlet 2 Is the power cord fully connected to the printer Connect the power cord to the AC input terminal of the
200. hen GB18030 is selected USER MODE rae 7 T WD ce X button 1 4 button lt button OFFSET VOLUME PITCH 0 00 OFFSET 0 00 DARKNESS 50 X button 4 button I PRINT SPEED X button 4 button 29 button X button i A button PITCH OFFSET mm X button 4 button I X button i 4 button GB18030 BIG5 ale m 4 button X button 9 2 BYTE FONTS button MINCHO X button Press the 4 gt Aor W button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 71 4 Operation and Configuration U A Press the lt 4 gt Aor W button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen X button 4 button Select YES button NOTIFICATION 5 FUNCTION SETTING button NOTICE FUNCTION CLEAN PRINTER CHANGE ROLLER Select NO button t o o 3 IO X button utton gt Select DISABLE A button gt ENABLE DRESS 4 F Select ENABLE A X button I button m m mmm m mm m mm um a um mmm mmm m a m CLEAN PRINTER NOTICE DISTANCE 009 m CHANGE ROLLER NOTICE DISTANCE 00 km AT AT CHANGE HEAD NOTICE DISTANCE I I I I I l
201. hers Restart Printer 200 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in The default user name and password are as follows User Name admin Password admin Authentication Required server http requires a username and password The server says 566 ex 203dpi User Name b v JJ Password Log In Cancel After logging in the Adjustment mode page is shown as follows Refer to Section 4 2 5 Adjustment Mode Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MeT MAC Address XXXXXXXAAXRAA Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status BdjusmenEmoge Information PITCH POSITION External signal Status Sensor level 3 5 3 75 OFFSET POSITION Printer Configuration Adjustment mode Her miade DARKNESS 50 Interface mode Interface mode SNMP 0 98 WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer 0 0 3 5 3 75 submit S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 201 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 5 User Mode Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the User mode page is shown as follows Refer to Section 4
202. i 22 dots H x 15 dots W S84 ex S86 ex 305 dpi 33 dots H x 22 dots W S84 ex 609 dpi 66 dots H x 44 dots W S84 ex S86 ex 203 dpi 24 dots H x 20 dots W S84 ex S86 ex 305 dpi 36 dots H x 30 dots W S84 ex 609 dpi 72 dots H x 60 dots W Simplified Chinese Mincho 16 dots H x 16 dots W Characters GB18030 24 dots H x 24 dots W Gothic 24 dots H x 24 dots W Traditional Chinese Mincho 24 dots H x 24 dots W Characters BIG5 Korea Fonts KSX1001 Mincho 16 dots H x 16 dots W 24 dots H x 24 dots W Scalable Fonts Rasterized Font CG Times CG Triumvirate Support Codepage 858 Bold Italic SATO Gamma SATO Vica Support WGL4 Thai CP874 Arabic Outline Fonts Alphanumeric Symbols Extended Fonts Font downloaded data Support 1 byte 2 byte characters 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 353 8 Appendix Barcodes 1D Barcodes UPC A UPC E JAN EAN 13 8 CODES39 CODE93 CODE128 GS1 128 UCC EAN1 28 CODABAR NW 7 ITF Industrial 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 MSI POSTNET BOOKLAND Intelligent Mail Barcode IMB GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Truncated GS1 DataBar Stacked GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked 2D Codes QR Code Micro QR Code Security QR Code PDF417 Micro PDF Maxi Code GS1 Data Matrix Data Matrix ECC200 Composite Symbols EAN 13 Composite CC A CC B EAN 8 Composite CC A CC B UPC A Composite CC A CC B UPC E Composite
203. ing progress CERT DOWNLOAD COMPLETED This screen shows when the certification data download is completed we CERT DOWNLOAD COMPLETED The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again CERT DOWNLOAD FAILED This screen shows when the certification data download has failed Power on the printer and try again iis CERT DOWNLOAD FAILED Note Make sure that there are certification files in the SD card or USB memory S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 193 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 23 Site Survey Mode This mode allows you to acquire the information of access points The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the site survey mode The table describes each setting screen in detail D q Power on Ad Hoc is selected in the WIRELESS SITE SURVEY MODE of the WLAN interface setting START Infrastructure is selected in the WIRELESS MODE i l l i ofthe WLAN interface setting SITE SURVEY Ad Hoc mode SEARCHING NO SEARCHING i Site survey mode stops when powered off X button SS ee ee ee ee eee 1 8 4 5 1 2 When AP is not found 101 123456 01 18 P button 01 002233123456 j 02 789ABC 10 25 02 002233789ABC i 103 AAAAAA 08 26 03 003456AAAAAA NOT FOUND AP 1 04 393939 08 45 04 0011AA393939 I l i button W button W button i i 1 The order of field intensity 1 is stronger i l i
204. ing the a FUNCTION setting LINE Dw Save the setting NYAKA PITCH SENSOR eyes DISABLE and go to the next screen CANCEL 7 Returns to the I previous screen Setting item Setting contents Valid arrow Select an item using the without saving display display buttons display 4 gt buttons the setting X S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 53 4 Operation and Configuration Setting values NAV KS PRINT OFFSET V M0000 H 0000 Ce EX A DOG ENTER ar ARA CANCEL Setting item Setting contents Valid arrow Move the cursor Change the value of display display buttons using the lt gt the highlighted cursor display buttons using the A V buttons 54 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Goes to the setting mode menu y without saving the mens Save the value and go to the next screen Al eeiam to the previous screen without saving the setting 4 Operation and Configuration 42 Operating Modes The printer contains a variety of the following operating modes Click on the blue links below to go directly to the details of the selected operating mode Online Mode Pause Mode Offline Mode Adjusting the Display Brightness Adjusting the Buzzer Volume Canceling the Print Job Adjustment Mode Work Shift Setting Mode Simple Standalone Mode Setting Mode Menu User Mode nterface Mode Memory Mode e Service Mode Advanced Mode Hex Dump
205. inter Wireless LAN optional antenna To install the optional wireless LAN antenna Fan filter To prevent dust from entering the printer AC input terminal Supplies power to the printer through the inserted power cord Before connecting make sure that the AC voltage of your region is in the range of AC 100 to 240 V 50 to 60 Hz RS 232C connector To connect the printer to the host computer using the RS 232C serial interface IEEE1284 connector To connect the printer to the host computer using the IEEE1284 interface LAN connector To connect the printer to the host computer using the LAN interface 1 Parts Identification 84 ex S86 ex Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Left Hand printer I2 SD CARD slot To install an SD card for additional memory N CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the SD card 3 USB connector Type B To connect the printer to the host computer using the USB interface EXT connector External signal interface Interface connector for external signals Connect the optional applicator to this terminal 584 ex 8S86 ex Operator Manual 17 1 Parts Identification Internal View 1 2 3 SD O 5 USB connector Type A For connecting to optional USB memory N CAUTION Be sure to
206. inter T to a support structure o E E LO A 5mm 0 2 5 positions Y zR EN pe 11 0 4 11 0 4 n amn a Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Left Hand 2 2 3 Media Dispensed View S84 ex printer 2 i E E to i 43 mm 1 7 O E E m io 2 O E E KH E R H 5 I ES EX udi lE E E to p lle zs E Americas Standard Right Hand 150 mm 5 9 131 mm 5 15 189 mm 7 4 Europe Asia Left Hand 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 23 2 Installing the Printer 2 24 Top View S84 ex printer __150 mm 5 9 174 mm 6 85 223 mm 8 8 174 mm 6 85 150 mm 5 9 24 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 150 mm 5 9 a A 2 51 mm P 219 mm 8 6 aai 10 mm 0 4 189 mm 7 4 Y 230 mm 9 1 Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Left Hand 2 Installing the Printer 2 25 Media Dispensed View S86 ex printer 150 mm 5 9 168 mm 6 6 2 4 231 mm 9 1 150 mm 5 9 4 4 43 mm 1 7 266 mm 10 5 36 mm 1 4 rt 150 mm 5 9 4 131 mm 5 15 4 243 mm 9 6 Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Left Hand 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 25 2 Installing the Printer 2 2 6 Top View S86 ex printer 150m
207. iscarded and cannot be printed Location of error occurrence Command error information Caaa in the command error message shows the location of command error The number of ESC commands from ESC A is shown in aaa Note that the ESC A command is not included in the number of ESC commands which can be shown up to 999 If the number of ESC commands exceeds 999 it is shown as 999 Example When a command error is detected by the Horizontal Print Position lt H gt command ESC A C001 ESC V100 C002 ESC H99999 gt Location of the command error C003 ESC L0202 C004 ESC M ABCDEF C005 ESC Q1 C006 ESC Z In this case C002 is the location of the error Error command name The command name in which an error is detected is shown in lt bb gt A one byte command name is left aligned Error code The cause of command error will be indicated in the code in cc where an error is being shown Analyzed improper command Received improper parameter Analyzed improper graphic and external character data Specified memory area card slot is inappropriate Tried to write to a write protected media Data is not registered The specified print start position is outside the printable area The printing image is outside the printable area Barcode only S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 279 06 Exceeded the registration area Memory full Number specified by registration command
208. ith AP Detected disconnection WLANBeaconLostCount count number by beacon 1 60 Yes 15 lost of the access point Enable Disable the EAP 0 DISABLE enone advanced authentication 1 ENABLE Pipe 0 OFF No user FTP authentication authentication FtpEnableLoginAccount SHE 1 ON User Yes OFF authentication FtpLoginUser FTP login user name 1 32 characters FtpLoginPassword A SNOG A T 0 32 characters ogin user Disconnected timeout FtpDisc Timeout time of the control 10 900 sec Yes 30 connection 0 Status 4 cycle response 1 Status 4 ENQ Yes Status 5 response 2 Status 3 5 RawProtocol Communication protocol RawRecvBufferSize Receive buffer size 4096 4096 RawDisc Timeout Disconnection timeout 0 3600 sec oe ees ENABLE DISABLE 0 DISABLE ownage Soule out disconnection timeout 1 ENABLE EDS WebAppLoginUser WEB page login user o 63 characters WebAppLoginPassword WES page login 0 63 characters password 0 Japanese 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE log print Yes DISABLE DebugMode Debug mode setting data eal aos Field intensity setting Absolute value from 00 to J threshold 1 99 l Field intensity setting Absolute value from 00 to Field intensity setting Absolute value from 00 to SignalLevel3 threshold 3 99 Y Yes 85 Yes 74 es 64 304 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix a Firmware version ofthe Firmware date of the BuildDate WLAN module
209. ize that is smaller than width 45 mm pitch 35 mm the write data is not printed And with the label size that is smaller than width 40 mm pitch 30 mm only slash is printed When the tag offset is set to other than the default add the value of tag offset to the pitch length The diagram below shows the message printed on the position based on the media size specified by the normal print command A1 WRITE TAG ERROR in RFID write READ TAG ERROR in tag data command print command TU lt 2 fa T Q D e WRITE TAG ERROR o 3031323334353637 3839414243444546 READ TAG ERROR TAG NOT FOUND error in RFID TAG NOT FOUND error in tag write command data print command TU INVENTORY CHECK is enabled lt D ex fa T D Q Q D e TAG NOT FOUND S 3031323334353637 3839414243444546 TAG NOT FOUND Dump data in HEX for the first sixteen bytes of the write data or the maximum thirty two characters in ASCII The dump data will be in HEX when non printable characters and control characters are included in the data Dotted line shows the range specified with media size command A1 0 0 The origin of the range specified by the media size command A1 340 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix When the data is consisted with all printable characters the dump data will be a maximum of thirty two characters in ASCII When there is a non printable character or a control code that are non printable t
210. k or change the power cord Do not place heavy objects on the power cord heat it or pull it Doing so could cause damage to the power cord and cause a fire or electric shock e f the power cord becomes damaged core is exposed wires broken etc contact your SATO reseller or technical support center Using the power cord in this condition could cause a fire or electric shock Do not change overly bend twist or pull the power cord Using the power cord in such a way could cause a fire or electric shock When the printer has been dropped or broken e f the printer is dropped or broken S immediately power off the printer and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Contact your SATO reseller or AN technical support center Using the printer in this condition could cause a fire e or electric shock Do not use the printer when something is unusual about it Continuing to use the printer in the event AN something is unusual about it such as smoke or unusual smells coming from it could cause a fire or electric shock e Immediately power off the printer and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Then contact your SATO reseller or technical support center for repairs Under no circumstances should you attempt repairs on your own it is too dangerous Before You Start Do not disassemble the printer Do not disassemble or modify the printer Doing so could cause a fire or electric shock Contact your SATO rese
211. l size of the selected type of information registered in the memory The maximum number of files is 999 STORED NO INFORMATION Shows the stored number of the registered information The stored number range is from 001 to 999 Note After you press the ENTER button the screen returns to PLEASE SELECT MEMORY 4 Operation and Configuration MEMORY SIZE X X GB XXXXXXXXXXBY TE STORED CONTENTS FORM OVERLAY FORMAT BMP FILE XXX XXXXXXXXXXBYTE FORM OVERLAY FORM OVERLAY BMP FILE STORED No 001 002 003 004 005 010 011 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 115 4 Operation and Configuration MEMORY FORMAT select whether or not to format the memory YES Format the memory MEMORY FORMAT NO Do not format the memory YES wW Note If you select NO the screen returns to MEMORY CARD MODE FORMAT START Confirm to start formatting the memory YES Start to format the memory FORMAT START NO Cancel formatting the memory YES NO Note 4 If you select NO the screen returns to MEMORY FORMAT FORMATTING Shows the formatting progress of the memory in es FORMATTING Note SL J E After formatting the memory card a completion message will show MEMORY FORMAT COMPLETED Shows that the formatting of the memory card is completed MEMORY FORMAT Note COMPLETED After you press the lt 4 ENTER button the screen returns to MEMORY PRESS ENTER KEY CARD MODE 11
212. ller or technical support center to perform AN internal inspections adjustments and repairs Using the head cleaning fluid A e Use of flame or heat around the head cleaning fluid is prohibited Do not heat it or subject it to flames e Keep the fluid out of reach of children If a child accidentally drinks the fluid immediately consult with a physician Print head e The print head will become hot after S printing Be careful not to touch it when replacing media or cleaning immediately after printing to avoid being burned A Touching the edge of the print head immediately after printing could cause an injury Use caution when replacing the media or cleaning the print head Never replace the print head if you have not received the correct training 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 9 Before You Start Do not use in areas of high humidity A e Do not use the printer in areas of high humidity or where condensation forms If condensation forms immediately power off the printer and do not use the printer until it dries Using the printer while condensation is on it could cause an electric shock Carrying the printer e When moving the printer always disconnect the power cord from the outlet and check to make sure that all external wires are disconnected before moving it Moving the printer with the wires still connected could cause damage to the cords or connecting wires resulting in a fire or electric sh
213. lowed PAPER END Allowed Can be setto 4 5 6 16 MACHINE ERROR Allowed No output PRINT END Output 5 Not Allowed ONLINE Output 6 Allowed RIBBON NEAR j EPin RIBBON NEAR END Allowed Note For details refer to Section 8 5 Input Output Signal of the External Signal DECIDE Select whether or not to confirm the input output signal setting e YES Proceed to the UPDATED SETTING screen NO Returns to the I O SIGNAL SETTING screen 152 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration UPDATED SETTING This screen shows that the input output signal setting has been updated Power on the printer again to make the setting effective UPDATED SETTING PLEASE POWER OFF I O SIGNALS INITIALIZE Select whether or not to initialize the pin number for the input output signal YES Proceed to the INITIALIZED SETTING screen 1 0 SIGNALS NO Proceed to the ZERO SLASH screen INITIALIZE Note NO 4k Refer to the default value of the pin number in INPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SIGNAL INITIALIZED SETTING This screen shows that the pin number for the input output signal has been initialized Power on the printer again to make the setting effective INITIALIZED SETTING PLEASE POWER OFF ZERO SLASH Set whether to print the number zero 0 with or without a slash e YES Print zero with a slash ZERO SLASH NO Print zero without a slash S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 153 4 Operatio
214. m 5 9 174 mm 6 85 223 mm 8 8 j 174 mm 6 85 150 mm 5 9 26 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 150 mm 5 9 P 2 51 mm P 219 mm 8 6 Pr 10 mm 0 4 243 mm 9 6 Y Americas Standard Right Hand 230 mm 9 1 Europe Asia Left Hand 2 Installing the Printer 2 3 Installing the Printer onto a Support Structure Applicator This printer must be installed onto a support structure applicator for correct operation The printer has five bores on the center frame for installing to a support structure Attach five bolts to the five bores on the center frame to install the printer onto the support structure N WARNING Make sure that you use the designated bolts that can accommodate the weight of the printer If you do not install the printer correctly it could fall out of the support structure This may cause injury The picture below shows the installation of the printer onto the support structure Note This picture is for an instructional display purpose only and is not to be interpreted as a precise example 584 ex 8S86 ex Operator Manual 27 2 Installing the Printer 24 Checking the Bundled Accessories After unpacking the printer make sure that you have all the bundled accessories If there are missing items contact the SATO reseller where you purchased the printer User documents AC
215. n 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 97 4 Operation and Configuration PORT NUMBER Set the LAN port numbers 1 to 3 The setting range is from 00001 to 65535 PORT NUMBER Note PORT NUMBER2 e Shows only if the LAN interface is selected Each port 1 2 and 3 must be set to different values PORT NUMBERS e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again WIRELESS MODE Set the communication method of the wireless LAN The options are as follows Ad Hoc WIRELESS MODE Infrastructure Note o Mnfrastructure e Shows only if the WLAN interface is selected e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again Set the SSID of the wireless LAN You can enter a maximum of thirty two characters including alphabet upper case and lower case numbers and symbols SSID SATO PRINTER Note e Shows only if the WLAN interface is selected e The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again CHANNEL Set the communication channel of the wireless LAN The setting range is from 01 to 13 and the default value is 06 CHANNEL Note e Shows only if the WLAN interface is selected The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again When the channel has become invalid due to a region code change the channel returns to its default setting 98 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual PROTOCOL Set the communication protocol STATUS3 When
216. n UPR UP the up position External signal LLL CC QO oL PREND TYPE1 Backfeed Backfeed Print 2nd label Operation Print 1st label Normally the print head is in the down position during backfeed However the print head will be lifted up when the ribbon print position is not identified S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 333 8 Appendix 8 10 3 Ribbon Saver Operation and Ribbon Consumption When a gap exists in front of the label The figure and table below show the minimum distance A from the top of the label to the print start position for each print soeed required for the ribbon saver function It also shows the consumption of the ribbon B when the ribbon saver is operating lt Label gt lt Ribbon gt Print data 1 Print data 2 BD Print data 1 Jl uonoeJip peoj eipeiw Print data 2 unit mm Print speed Ribbon Distance A inches sec consumption B es o ee The ribbon consumption might be different from the value in the above table depending on the ribbon condition 334 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix When a gap exists in the print data The figure and table below show the minimum distance A required from the end of printing to the next print start position It also shows the consumption of the ribbon B when the ribbon saver is operating lt Label gt lt Ribbon gt Print data 1 Print data 1 B Print data
217. n and Configuration AUTO ONLINE Set the auto online function This function sets the printer status at power on AUTO ONLINE YES Start up the printer in online mode NO Start up the printer in offline mode YES NO PRINT OFFSET When setting the print position in the vertical direction V oet the offset value with from the print reference position to move the print position opposite the feed direction and value with to move the print PRINT OFFSET position in the feed direction MEM 0 V 80000 H 0000 When setting the print position in the horizontal direction H T Set the offset value with from the print reference position to move to the left side and value with to move to the right side of the printer when facing the front of the printer The setting range varies depending on the model as follows woa vo ue HEAD DOT DENSITY Toggle the head dot density from 12 dots mm to 6 dots mm and vice versa The following options are available e 100 Approximately four inches Effective for S84 ex only HEAD DOT DENSITY e 150 Approximately six inches Effective for S84 ex and S86 ex e 300 Approximately twelve inches Effective for S84 ex and S86 ex 100 150 Note Shows only if the head dot density is 12 dots mm and COMPATIBLE MODE is enabled For details on the compatible mode refer to Section 8 3 About Compatible Mode 154 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual SET CALENDAR Select whether
218. n the printer again IPv4 SUBNET MASK Set the IPv4 subnet mask address The setting range is from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 The default value is 255 255 255 000 Pv4 SUBNET MASK Note 55 255 255 000 e Shows only if the LAN or WLAN interface is selected im he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again IPv4 GATEWAY ADR oet the IPv4 gateway address The setting range is from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 The default value is 000 000 000 000 for LAN and 192 168 001 002 for Pv4 GATEWAY ADR WLAN 00 000 000 000 Note dui e Shows only if the LAN or WLAN interface is selected he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again OG S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration IPv6 RESOLUTION Select IPv6 address setting method The options are as follows Pvo RESOLUTION AUTO MANUAL AUTO e DHCP MANUAL Note Shows only if the LAN interface is selected IPv6 ADDRESS Set the IPv6 address Pv6 ADDRESS Note Shows only if the LAN interface is selected and MANUAL is selected at IPv6 RESOLUTION screen PREFIX LENGTH oet the prefix length PREFIX LENGTH Note Shows only if the LAN interface is selected and MANUAL is selected at IPv6 RESOLUTION screen DEFAULT ROUTER Set the default router of IPv6 DEFAULT ROUTER Note Shows only if the LAN interface is selected and MANUAL is selected at IPv6 RESOLUTION scree
219. ndard USB Interface Type B LAN Interface RS 232C Interface IEEE1284 Interface External Signal Interface EXT SD card slot USB Interface Type A Optional Bluetooth Interface Wireless LAN Interface S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 351 8 Appendix 8 12 4 Built in Functions Built in Functions Status return Graphic Sequential number Form overlay External font registration Character modification Black white inversion Ruled line Dump list Hex dump mode Format registration Outline font Outline modification Zero slash switching Unicode UTF 8 UTF 16 switching Simple standalone Work shift setting mode XML print WEB browser printer setting If wireless LAN is installed Self diagnosis Functions Broken head element check Head open detection Paper end detection Ribbon end detection Ribbon near end detection Test print Kanji data check Cover open detection Calendar check setting Sensor cover open detection Label near end signal receive and input from the applicator and report output of label near end status through EXT Adjustment Functions Print Darkness Print Position Media Stop Position Buzzer Volume LCD Brightness Protective Functions Head overheating protection function Power supply temperature monitor function 8 12 5 Printer Languages Printer Languages 352 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 12 6 Fonts Symbols Barcodes Bitmap Fonts 9 dots H x 5 dots W S84 ex S86 ex 203 dp
220. nds Cadmium and cadmium compounds Polybrominated biphenyls PBB Polybrominated diphenyl ethers PBDE Wireless LAN 2 45 GHz FCC 15B FCC 15C R amp TTE EN300 328 V1 4 2003 04 EN301 489 V1 4 1 2002 08 SRRC MIC RCM S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 355 8 Appendix 0 13 Interface Specifications For data communication with the host this printer supports the following interfaces You can set the various interface settings of the printer through the Interface Mode menu USB USB type B LAN Ethernet e RS 232C DB 9 pins female e EEE1284 Amphenol 36 pins External signal EXT DB 25 pins female Optional Bluetooth Optional Wireless LAN CAUTION Do not connect or disconnect the interface cables or use a switch box with power supplied to either the printer or host This may cause damage to the interface circuitry in the printer or host and is not covered by warranty Note Bluetooth and wireless LAN are optional interfaces e You cannot use the wireless LAN interface and USB interface at a time 356 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix 8 13 1 USB Interface This interface complies with the USB2 0 standard Install the USB driver to the computer before use Pin Assignments PiNo Description Cable Specifications Cable Connector USB Type B connector Cable Length 5 m 16 4 feet or less 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 35 8 Appendix 8 13 2 LAN Ethernet In
221. nec sensor iyesi Serine conectsensortype e isthe otsetsetoorecty Museo Is the pitch offset or base reference point offset Adjust the pitch offset or base reference point set correctly offset Is the platen roller dirty If the platen roller is dirty clean it using the cleaning kit For printer cleaning refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller Is the media sensor dirty If the media sensor is dirty clean it using the cleaning kit For printer cleaning refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller Is the data or signal sent from the computer Power on the device again incorrect Check the data sent from the computer and communication conditions Is the platen roller damaged Replace the platen roller 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 28 7 Troubleshooting 75 Interface Troubleshooting When an interface error occurs on the printer check with the checklist related to that interface 7 5 1 USB Interface 1 Check that the USB cable is connected correctly Check that the USB cable is connected correctly 8 1 Check that the cable is not damaged 3 Check the configuration of the printer Check the setting of the USB interface through the INTERFACE MODE menu e Poweronthe priterandcompueragain SS 7 5 2 LAN Ethernet Interface Check that the LAN cable is connected correctly Check that the cable is not damaged 3 Check the configuration of the prin
222. ns are as follows PRIVACY PROTOCOL NONE DES NONE AES DES Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 87 4 Operation and Configuration PRIVACY KEY Inout SNMP privacy key Input more than 8 characters for the authentication name Press the lt P buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to PRIVACY KEY change the value E Press the lt ENTER button to save the value and proceed to the next setting screen Note e When the authentication name is less than 8 characters there will be buzzer sounds and it will not move to the next screen e Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols from 20H to 7EH can be set e Specify _ to input a space The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again USER MIB WRITE Enable or disable writing to MIB at authentication access ENABLE Allows writing to MIB USER MIB WRITE DISABLE Does not allow writing to MIB ENABLE DERYA 4 F Note Writing possible OID are sysContact sysName and sysLocation Set the SNMP trap e ENABLE Allows the SNMP trap TRAP DISABLE Does not allow the SNMP trap ENABLE MISISJRE 4 k Note The setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again 88 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual COMMUNITY NAME Input SNMP trap community name Press the lt gt buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to
223. nt quality N CAUTION e The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury The routing path of the ribbon is shown in the right picture Face in ribbon m fFace out ribbon Note You can also refer to the sticker located on the inner side of the top cover 1 Open the top cover CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 38 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 2 urine head lociciever ciacenice to unlock the print head 3 Load the ribbon G onto the ribbon supply spindle While taking note of the wind direction insert the ribbon all the way in Make sure that the ink side of the ribbon is facing down when passing it below the print head 4 Load an empty ribbon core onto the ribbon rewind spindle Insert the core all the way in 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 39 3 Loading the Ribbon and Media 5 From the ribbon supply spindle pass the ribbon below the print head and to the ribbon rewind spindle 9 6 Wind the ribbon clockwise around the empty ribbon core on the ribbon rewind spindle Attach the free end of the ribbon to the core with adhesive tape Turn the ribbon rewind spindle clockwise for several rounds to wind the ribbon 8 If the media is
224. o Message LED Buzzer Cause _ Countermeasure Cover open error Flashes red The cover is opened Glose the cover the cover The sensor for sensing Replace the sensor for the open close status of sensing the open close the cover is defective status of the cover Three short beeps To clear the error Close the cover 5 PLEASE CLOSE COVER Saver error Lights red The print head cannot Adjust the saver head TT stop at the specified position One long beep position Replace the saver sensor To clear the error Power off the printer Replace the saver motor and motor driver PCB Replace the saver cam Sensor cover open Flashes red The sensor cover is Lock the sensor cover error unlocked Aree SNOT OEPS The sensor for sensing Replace the sensor for the open close status of sensing the open close the sensor cover is status of the sensor cover defective E Tm LABEL SENSOR To clear the error COVER OPEN Close the sensor cover Ch 8 PLEASE CLOSE SENSOR COVER 278 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting 7 1 1 More Information about Command Error Printer motion when detecting a command error When COMMAND ERROR is set to ENABLE in advanced mode the command error information is shown on the error message second line and the print operation is paused This error can be cleared by pressing the Pll LINE button but the data in which an error is detected is qeaaa lt bb gt cc d
225. o emulation mode switching function is added to the SZPL emulation firmware to allow users to easily switch modes from SBPL to SZPL and vice versa The printer will automatically detect the type of data stream it received from the user and automatically switch to the appropriate mode SBPL mode or SZPL mode The auto emulation mode switching function can be disabled by using the lt EMU gt command Note Due to the S84 ex S86 ex emulation module design the standard SBPL functionality have been removed and the firmware only support minimum set of commands such as ENQ SOH commands or Test print commands to work with the AIOT printer management tool continuously If full functionality is required select the STD firmware module from emulation module loader 234 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode 53 SDPL Emulation Mode The SDPL Emulation Mode is available when the printer is loaded with SDPL Emulation firmware The RFID option is not supported in this emulation firmware The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the SDPL emulation firmware The table describes each setting screen in detail ai R gt Il button fH ONLINE QTY 000000 OFFLINE QTY 000000 43 button Shows only when the PASSWORD input is enabled CTRL CODE TYPE STANDARD ALTERNATE 1 ALTERNATE 2 CUSTOM X button wm 0mm e 0 umo o umo 0 e mmo umo 0 ums mns umo h m 4 button l Shows only wh
226. ock Do not carry the printer while it contains media The media could fall out and Cause an injury e When setting the printer on the floor or a stand be sure not to get your fingers or hands pinched under the printer feet Power supply e f your hands are wet do not operate the AN power switch connect the power cord or disconnect the power cord Doing so could cause an electric shock Power cord e Keep the power cord away from hot S devices Placing the power cord near hot devices could cause the cord s covering e When disconnecting the power cord from the outlet be sure to hold the plug Pulling the cord could expose or break the wires and cause a fire or electric shock e The power cord set that comes with the printer is designed especially for this printer Do not use it with any other electrical devices 10 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual to melt and cause a fire or electric shock Top cover e Be careful not to get your fingers pinched AA when opening or closing the top cover Also be careful that the top cover does not slip off and drop Loading media e When loading a media roll be careful not AA to get your fingers pinched between the media roll and the supply unit When not using the printer for a long time e When not using the printer for a long e time disconnect the power cord from the outlet to maintain safety During maintenance and cleaning e When maintaining and cleaning the Z printer di
227. ode SELECT SHIFT 2 3 EXIT A button ONLINE QTY 000000 PITCH POSITION EDT mm A V amp buttons A button Simple STANDALONE MODE Press for 5 Standalone Mode MO SAVE gt seconds a f X button C li h Ry ncelin angen ie CANCEL PRINT JOB ted Print Job YES ES button Interface i Mode a button Memory Mode y button P button Advanced i Mode el button Hex Dump i Mode TOM le mmt a a Pn mt Lord mro v c c m a Shows only if you have installed the optional RFID l RFID User kit and enabled RFID mode 1 Mode ue N 2655 66 S256 2555 eee sae nus Es ces lt button Information Mode More operations are shown on the next page m Power on Test Print Mode X Power on Default Setting Mode v Power on Download Mode At Power on Upload Mode 44 A P Power on Hidden Setting Mode D p Power on Wireless LAN Certificate Download Mode DS q Power on Site Survey TEST PRINT MODE CONFIGURATION BARCODE n DEFAULT MODE G PRINTER SETTIN ALT PROTOCOL 4 INTERFACE SELECT INTERFACE SD CARD INTERFACE SELECT SD CARD USB MEMORY LABEL OUT SENSOR YES NO 4 k CERT DOWNLOAD SD CARD USB MEMORY SITE SURVEY START 4 Operation and Configuration S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 57 7 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 1 Online Mode Pause Mode Offline Mode In online mode the printer is ready to receive print data from the
228. ode 0 3 RFID mode Emulation mode System Others inen Restart Printer laden setting LABEL OUT SENSOR YES SHIFT CODE NO work shift SELECT SHIFT Y SHIFT1 ENTER SHIFT TIME ee ENTER SHIFT NAME SHIFT2 ENTER SHIFT TIME TH ENTER SHIFT NAME SHIFT3 ENTER SHIFT TIME OUR ENTER SHIFT NAME Submit 218 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual MINUTE og MINUTE 00 MINUTE 0D 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 16 Restart Printer Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the page is shown as follows Model S66 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm ASA 2799 MAC Address XX XX XX XXOCXX Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Display Status Information External signal Status Sensor level PEET CONTENEN Are you sure to restart this printer Adjustment mode User mode You can t connect this printer while it s rebooting Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 219 4 Operation and Configuration This page is intentionally left blank 220 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Emulation Mode The emulation mode allows the S 84 ex S86 ex printer to function in virtually all legacy external party programming language environment with
229. on the sensor will respond to an incoming SENSOR LEVEL gap The adjustment range is from 1 to 3 and is shown on the bottom line GAP E X XV of the screen ADJUST LEVEL oh m SENSOR LEVEL GAP R Shows the current level Reception of the gap sensor on the upper part of the screen This offset determines how soon the sensor will respond to an incoming SENSOR LEVEL gap The adjustment range is from 0 to 127 and is shown on the bottom GAP R X XV line of the screen ADJUST LEVEL 090 SENSOR LEVEL GAP SLICE Shows the current level Reception of the gap sensor on the upper part of the screen The slice level is calculated automatically and shown on the bottom line SENSOR LEVEL The slice level can be set to 0 0 V or from 0 3 V to 2 9 V adjustable in GAP R X XV increments of 0 1 V SLICE LEVEL IN Note he slice level is set automatically by the firmware when the value is set to 0 0 V In the case of automatic calculation the calculated value will be shown automatically after printing S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 123 4 Operation and Configuration Function Settings The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the function settings The table describes each setting screen in detail Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen SETTING Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the SERVICE MODE se
230. or not to set the calendar YES Proceed to the calendar setting screen NO Proceed to the CHARACTER PITCH screen Note Shows only if the calendar IC is installed CALENDAR CALENDAR INPUT Set the Year Month Date and then set the time in 24 hour format Enter the date and time twice When the entered value of both screens match it goes to the next screen after saving the value If not the printer beeps and returns to the first entry screen The second entry is indicated as CALENDAR INPUT on the screen The setting range is from 81 01 01 00 00 January 01 1981 at 00 00 to 80 12 31 0 00 December 31 2080 at 00 00 Note Shows only if YES is selected in the SET CALENDAR screen CALENDAR DAY OF WEEK CODE Set the day of the week code for the calendar The setting range is from 0 to 9 A to Z and a to z The default value is 1 SUNDAY 2 MONDAY 3 TUESDAY 4 WEDNESDAY 5 THURSDAY 6 FRIDAY 7 SATURDAY Select the day using the A V buttons select the day of the week code using the lt P buttons then press the ENTER button to confirm the day of week code Note Shows only if YES is selected in the SET CALENDAR screen 4 Operation and Configuration SET CALENDAR NO 4 F CALENDAR CALENDAR INPUT ill 01 01 00 00 Ax CALENDAR DAY OF WEEK CODE SUNDAY Ak S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 155 4 Operation and Configuration CALENDAR MONTH CODE Set the month code for the calendar The settin
231. or the sensor adjustment MARK Adjust the I mark sensor SENSOR SELECT GAP Adjust the Gap sensor 1 MARK Note GAP Shows only if AUTO is selected for the sensor adjustment method l mark sensor adjustment explanation screen This screen shows the instruction to place the media for l mark sensor adjustment Shows only if I MARK is selected in the SENSOR SELECT screen INSERT WHITE AREA OF LABELS UNDER SENSOR PRESS ENTER KEY Gap sensor adjustment explanation screen This screen shows the instruction to place the media for I mark sensor adjustment Shows only if GAP is selected in the SENSOR SELECT screen REMOVE LABEL PLACE LINER After placing the media press the 4 ENTER button to start the automatic sensor adjustment After placing the label press the lt ENTER button to start the automatic sensor adjustment UNDER SENSOR PRESS ENTER KEY S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 121 4 Operation and Configuration CALIBRATION COMPLETE FAILED This screen shows the result of the automatic sensor adjustment e COMPLETE The automatic adjustment has succeeded CALIBRATION FAILED The automatic adjustment has failed COMPLETE Press the lt 4 ENTER button to proceed to the next screen PRESS ENTER KEY CALIBRATION FAILED PRESS ENTER KEY CALIBRATION Select to exit the automatic sensor adjustment or retry the automatic sensor adjustment CALIBRATION EXIT CALIBRATION Exit the automatic senso
232. ot supported in this emulation firmware The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the SZPL emulation firmware The table describes each setting screen in detail 7M rH P gt Il button Press the 4 P Aor W button ONLINE OFFLINE QTY 000000 QTY 000000 to select an item or set the 1 value accordingly The active X button i arrow icons are shown on the screen Top Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the EMULATION MODE menu V Bo00 l 4 button X button HEAD CHECK LABEL 0000 A T 4 button X button PROTOCOL L l Shows only when the n PASSWORD input is enabled Md ACK ZEBRA 4 F 4 button neo om e m m m e m m e m m m m m m e m o af H 4 button X button RS485 NETWK ID i 4 button X button CONTROL HEADER CHAR i 4 button X button COMMAND HEADER X button 1 Shows only when the LCD is selected in SIZE MODE PAE OELE ROY WIDTH sy CHAR lt button X button X button LABEL SIZE ADJ DELIMITER CHAR HEIGHT WE YZ CHAR l I l I I l A button I l l l I 4 button 4 button X button EMULATION MODE 26 b 7 T T AHD 4 button 230 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode ROTATE LABEL set the rotation for printing 0 Print the media as usual without rotation ROTATE LABEL 1
233. ote These are the logical values based on the wireless LAN specifications and are not the actual data transfer speeds Communication Distance Indoor max 100 m Outdoor max 240 m Communication distance depends on environment Frequency Band 2 4 GHz 2 412 to 2 485 GHz Communication Channel The number of channels you can set varies depending on the region where you use the printer SSID Any alphanumeric character maximum 32 Default SATO PRINTER Authentication Open System Shared Key WPA WPA2 Perform the RADIUS server authentication using 802 1x EAP TLS LEAP EAP TTLS EAP PEAP EAP FAST protocol Encryption None WEP 64 bits 1 28 bits TKIP WPA PSK WPA2 PSK WPA 802 1x WPA2 802 1x authentication AES WPA PSK WPA2 PSK WPA 802 1x WPA2 802 1x authentication 376 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Basic Specifications Communication Mode Infrastructure Ad Hoc In IEEE802 11n only Infrastructure mode is available Software Specifications 584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 377 Extensive contact information for worldwide SATO operations can be found on the Internet at www satoworldwide com NAVAS
234. out requiring modification to host data stream 51 Emulation Module Loader When the printer is started up with the emulation loader user can load or delete the selected emulation module or download emulation module The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the emulation loader Press the button Power On INITIALIZING MODULE LOADER VER 61 XX XX XX MODULE SETTING LOAD DELETE DOWNLOAD 1 Press and hold the S FUNCTION button and power on the printer Release the S FUNCTION button when the buzzer beeps MODULE SETTING Select the module loader function using the A V buttons and then press the ENTER button MODULE SETTING e LOAD Load the standard firmware or emulation firmware LOAD e DELETE Delete the selected emulation module DELETE DOWNLOAD Download the emulation firmware to the printer DOWNLOAD Note If there is no emulation module downloaded to the printer memory you cannot select the DELETE function S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 221 5 Emulation Mode 5 1 1 Loading the Emulation Module In the emulation module loader user can select to load the standard or emulation module The valid downloaded emulation module is listed on the display A total of four emulation modules can be downloaded to the printer memory However it is subject to the download area availability and other prevailing condition The printer will not support SBPL command data printing
235. p to 500 m roll 2 to 12 inches more than 20 mm of printing Under 82 mm in diameter Up to 600 m roll 2 to 6 inches more than 30 mm of printing Under 108 mm in diameter Be sure to remove the used ribbon at the rewinder side and replace the paper core with a new one when using up one roll of ribbon Be sure to perform the preliminary operation check because the lengths of ribbon mentioned above are calculated from mechanical structure and have a limitation according to the type of ribbon operating environment and usage 8 10 5 Label Specification for the Ribbon Saver S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 9337 8 Appendix 8 11 Optional UHF RFID Configuration This section provides more information on the RFID operations 1 Examine the media to determine the printer settings Refer to the S84ex UHF Inlay Configuration Guide for the measurements you should take and what they mean as well as a list of inlays and their required configurations 2 Press the power switch on the operator panel to I position QTY 000000 3 When the printer is in online mode press the gt Il LINE button on the operator panel to change to offline mode i OFFLINE QTY 000000 4 Press the ENTER button to show the setting mode menu E 5 Press the A W lt gt buttons to select RFID USER MODE and then press the RFID USER MODE ENTER button aF The RFID USER MODE screen shows RFID 6 Press the A W 4 buttons to selec
236. pecifications Check the orientation of the connector before you make the connection 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 29 2 Installing the Printer 3 Connect the applicator cable from the EXT connector of the printer to the applicator Use a cable that is compatible with the standard of the interface board as stated in Section 8 13 Interface Specifications Check the orientation of the connector before you make the connection N CAUTION Do not connect or disconnect the interface cables or use a switch box with power supplied to either the printer or computer This action may cause damage to the interface circuitry in the printer or computer The warranty does not cover such damages 25 3 Interface Settings You can set the various interface settings of the printer through the interface mode menu For details refer to Section 4 2 10 Interface Mode In interface mode you need to configure both the data port and sub port An overview of each port is shown below Data port When the interface is set to the data port it can receive various SBPL commands and receive print data from the host computer Data port selection USB LAN RS 232C IEEE1284 Bluetooth WLAN Wireless LAN The optional Bluetooth and optional wireless LAN are available if you have installed them You cannot select the interface that has already been set for the SUB PORT Sub port This port is for monitoring the printer status Sub port selection NONE USB
237. pecify command lt gt Graphic printing is not enlarged by the Not enlarged The image is enlarged enlarge specify command lt L gt Graphic printing is not offset by base offset No offset The image is offset command A3 Outline font setting The minimum value for the font The minimum value for the font width 1 dot width 24 dot The minimum value for the font The minimum value for the font height 1 dot height 24 dot When EANS is specified with barcode No human readable Human readable characters setting ratio 2 5 BD auto human characters are printed readable character is not printed with all bar ratio When EAN13 UPC A is specified with No human readable Human readable characters barcode setting ratio 2 5 BD auto characters are printed human readable character is not printed with all bar ratio only for 8 dots mm 308 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Compatible Mode T 0N OF When EAN13 UPC A is specified with No human readable Human readable characters barcode setting auto human readable characters are printed character is not printed with other than quadruple bar ratio in BD and with more than quintuple in D only for 12 dots mm When the barcode type of barcode setting The input digit is fixed to 8 The input digit is according to lt B gt D BD is specified to EAN8 the digits the command specification print data input digit is fixed
238. perform a virus check for the USB memory before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory Ribbon supply spindle AD Media sensor adjustment knob Used to adjust the position of the media sensor Media guide 18 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual amp SO VO Feed lock latch Used to open the feed roller and media sensor assembly Pressure roller release tab Used to release the pressure plate Ribbon rewind spindle Head lock lever Used to release the print head assembly Ribbon roller Print head Consumables The part to print on the media Perform regular maintenance Platen roller Consumables 1 Parts Identification 13 Parts on the Operator Panel 1 3 1 Operator Panel 3 Note Remove the protective sheet from the operator panel before use D PI LINE button Toggle between online offline mode LCD FEED button Feed a piece of media when the printer is in offline mode LED indicator D FUNCTION button Operates the set function when the printer is in normal mode OO OO Returns to the setting mode menu from the setting screens 4 ENTER button Enter the setting mode menu when the printer is in offline mode Confirm the selected item or setting value when the printer is in setting mode D X CANCEL button Go to the CA
239. posure to direct sunlight will make the sensor less responsive and may cause the media to be sensed incorrectly Close the top cover when printing Supply a stable source of electricity to the printer When using the printer do not share its power outlet with other electrical devices that could cause power fluctuations and performance issues with your printer 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 11 Before You Start Regulatory Approval FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense FCC Statement for Optional Wireless LAN This device complies with RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all people and must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitt
240. printer again SUB PORT oelect the connected interface for use with the data port The options are as follows e USB LAN RS 232C IEEE 1284 Bluetooth WLAN NONE Note Bluetooth shows even if a Bluetooth adapter is not connected e WLAN shows only if a WLAN unit is installed You cannot select the interface that has already been set for the DATA PORT e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again IGNORE CR LF Ignore or acknowledge the CR LF code of the received data e YES Ignore the CR LF code NO Do not ignore the CR LF code Note Shows only if the DATA PORT is selected 82 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual ATA PORT D LAN BLuetooth IGNORE CR LF NO 4 Operation and Configuration IGNORE CAN DLE Ignore or acknowledge the CAN DLE code of the received data YES Ignore the CAN DLE code IGNORE CAN DLE NO Do not ignore the CAN DLE code YES W Note Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUSA SNTP FUNCTION Enable or disable the SNTP function ENABLE Perform the time correction of the calendar IC SNTP FUNCTION ENABLE MINTASRZ 4 F DISABLE Do not perform the time correction of the calendar IC Note Shows only if the calendar IC is installed and the LAN interface is selected IPv4 6 select Select IP address type of SNTP IPv4 Pv4 6 select IPv6 Pv4 Pv6 Note 4 Shows only if the SNTP function is enabled NTP IPv4 ADDRESS Se
241. printer fully 3 Is the printer fuse blown Replace the printer fuse Contact a SATO reseller or technical service center for replacement Is the power cord damaged Replace the power cord Contact a SATO reseller or technical service center for the specific power cord for this printer Do not use power cords that are not designed specifically for this printer Is there electricity at the AC outlet that supplies Check if there is electricity at the AC outlet the power to the printer Connect to another AC outlet Is the main CONT PCB defective Replace the main CONT PCB Contact a SATO reseller or technical service center for replacement 7 4 2 Cannot Feed the Media Wmt ochek _ Countermeasure 1 Are the media and ribbon designed for the Use media and ribbon designed for the printer printer Are the media and ribbon loaded correctly Load the media and ribbon correctly 284 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting Countermeasure Oo Is the media or ribbon deformed Use the media or ribbon that is not deformed You cannot feed the media or ribbon that is deformed Is the media guide set correctly Adjust the media guide Is the correct sensor type set oet the correct sensor type Is the sensitivity of the sensor set correctly Adjust the sensor level Is the platen roller dirty If the platen roller is dirty clean it with the cleaning kit For printer cleaning refer to Section 6 2 M
242. r adjustment RETRY Retry the automatic sensor adjustment TEE SENSOR LEVEL I MARK E Shows the current level Emission of the I mark sensor on the upper part of the screen This offset determines how soon the sensor will respond to an incoming SENSOR LEVEL I mark The adjustment range is from 1 to 3 and is shown on the bottom MARK E X XV line of the screen ADJUST LEVEL ah r SENSOR LEVEL I MARK R Shows the current level Reception of the I mark sensor on the upper part of the screen This offset determines how soon the sensor will respond to an incoming SENSOR LEVEL I mark The adjustment range is from 0 to 127 and is shown on the bottom MARK R X XV line of the screen ADJUST LEVEL 090 122 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration SENSOR LEVEL I MARK SLICE shows the current level Reception of the I mark sensor on the upper part of the screen The slice level is calculated automatically and shown on the bottom line SENSOR LEVEL The slice level can be set to 0 0 V or from 0 3 V to 2 9 V adjustable in MARK R X XV increments of 0 1 V SLICE LEVEL IN Note he slice level is set automatically when the value is set to 0 0 V In the case of automatic calculation the calculated value will be shown automatically after printing SENSOR LEVEL GAP E Shows the current level Emission of the gap sensor on the upper part of the screen This offset determines how so
243. r occurs The printer pauses with the error message when it has reached the MAX ERR COUNT specified number of errors The setting range is from O to 9 TIME S If you set to 0 the RFID error screen shows and printing continues r RFID ERR SLASH Select whether or not to print a slash on a tag when an RFID tag error occurred RFID ERR SLASH e YES Prints a slash at the time of RFID tag error NO Do not print a slash at the time of RFID tag error Only RFID TAG YES NO ERROR is printed S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 169 4 Operation and Configuration RFID ERR OUTPUT Set the output pattern at RFID error e PULSE Single shot pulse output RFID ERR OUIPUT LEVEL Flat level output PULSE Halal 4 F LENGTH OF PULSE oet the pulse width The setting range is from 100 to 500 msec LENGTH OF PULSE Note msec Shows only if PULSE is selected in the RFID ERR OUTPUT screen READER VERSION This screen shows the firmware version of the RFID module This screen is not shown correctly when the RFID module is neither connected correctly nor configured correctly iei e MIClO XX XX XX AX PRESS ENTER KEY VIEW EPC DATA oelect whether or not to read and show the data of the RFID tag Tag needed to be set at the correct position at antenna position for correct reading VIEW EPC DATA Press the A V buttons to select the reading area from EPC TID USER VIEW TID DATA and PC VIEW USER DATA YES The
244. r than the PSI value AH e he setting will be effective only if you power on the printer again S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 109 4 Operation and Configuration PROTOCOL Set the communication protocol The following options are available e STATUS3 PROTOCOL duca STATUS3 STATUS4 CRC CHECK Set the CRC check function ENABLE Enable the CRC check function CRC CHECK DISABLE Disable the CRC check function ENABLE PANN Note SE shows only if the Bluetooth interface is selected 110 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 11 Memory Mode The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the memory mode The table describes each setting screen in detail N CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card MEMORY CARD MODE m 2n ant GOGH i 4 button Press the 4 gt A or VW button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the 2 button on each screen will revert to the MEMORY CARD MODE menu ee n o m m m m m n um mo Om Mm m n Am mo m Am mom Aum mom AM mo m uA mo m om Shows only when the PASSWORD input is enabled 4 button E m um e mee mo EE EEE EEE
245. rate on this inlay Recommended non printable zone 7 Me RFID tag label ABCDEF J Print object mark 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 34 8 Appendix 0 12 Printer Specifications Specifications are subject to change without notice 8 12 1 Hardware Dimensions and Weight Width 245 mm 9 65 Height 300 mm 11 817 Depth S84 ex 408 mm 16 06 S86 ex 463 mm 18 23 Weight 584 ex Approximately 13 7 kg 30 2 lbs S86 ex Approximately 15 1 kg 33 3 lbs Power Supply Input Voltage AC 100 V 240 V 10 Power Consumption At peak 180 VA 180 W Print ratio 3096 Standby 30 VA 25 W Input voltage condition AC 115 V 50 Hz Heceive Buffer Maximum 2 95 MB Near full 2 MB External Memory SD card Maximum 2 GB SDHC card Minimum 4 GB Maximum 32 GB USB flash memory Maximum 32 GB Graphic LCD Horizontal 128 dots X Vertical 64 dots with backlight White orange switchable Status Blue Red Environmental Conditions Without Media and Ribbon Operating Temperature 5 to 40 C 23 to 104 F Storage Temperature 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F Operating Humidity 15 to 85 RH Non condensing Storage Humidity 15 to 90 RH Non condensing 348 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Print 8 Appendix Print Method Direct thermal and thermal transfer Print Speed Resolution Non printable Area Printable Area o84 ex 203 dpi 4 to 16 inches sec 101 6 to 406
246. re for the print speed is as follows 1 When the printer is in online mode press the gt Il LINE button to change the printer to offline mode 2 Press the ENTER button The printer changes to setting mode menu ONLINE MODE mae rT RFID vi E Li TT 3 Select the USER MODE using the A lt 4 gt buttons USER MODE USER MODE shows on the screen and the icon is NI ri highlighted in reverse HE RFID vi E i TT S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 253 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 4 Press the ENTER button to enter the user mode OFFSET VOLUME OFFSET VOLUME shows on the screen PITCH 0 00 MEN OFFSET 0 00 Note DARKNESS 50 If password function is enabled PASSWORD is shown on the screen instead In this case enter the password first 5 Press the ENTER button again until PRINT SPEED shows on the screen PRINT SPEED Press the A buttons to select a value Wa IPS 7 Press the 4 ENTER button to save the setting Press the FUNCTION button to return to the setting mode menu 254 S84 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 65 Adjusting the Media Sensors You can check the media sensor condition and adjust the media sensor level for optimum performance 6 5 1 Adjusting the Media Sensor Automatically The automatic adjustment procedure for the media sensor is as follows 1 When the printer is in online mode press the I LINE button
247. rt Printer Network Authentication Open System Use WEP DISABLE KEY INDEX KEY 1 KEY KEY3 KEY4 WPA WPA2 Config WPA MODE Encryption Pre Shared Key 206 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 802 1x Config 802 1x Authentication Authentication Mode USER NAME PASSWORD WPA 802 1x Config Authentication Mode USER NAME PASSWORD 802 1x Pre Authentication 802 1x TTLS Config Inner Authentication Server Auth Enable 802 1x PEAP Config Inner Authentication MSCHAPv2 Server Auth Enable OFF 802 1x FAST Config PAC auto provisioning OFF Submit Note Reapply the setting data update after the system reboots S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 207 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 9 WLAN Certificate Login is required to view this page Enter the correct user name and password to log in as shown in Section 4 3 4 Adjustment Mode After logging in the WLAN Certificate page is shown as follows Refer to Section 4 2 22 Wireless LAN Certificate Download Mode Model S85 ex 203dpi Hesolution 203dpi 8 dpmm TaT MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XN Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World WLAN Certificate Display Status 4 Select a fil h E ed Select Intuemialinin select a file type input the password and press Select External signal Status Select a file type Sensor level Printer Configuration Client Certificate Adjustment mode Hir mide PASSWORD Interface mode Interfa de S
248. s e here should be no command errors in the SBPL command e he file name should be equal or less than 16 characters and the extension should be SSA Refer to below descriptions on SET NAME screen for usable characters e The data should be saved to SD card USB memory route PR61 DATA folder STANDALONE MODE Select the following options using the lt P buttons and then press the 4 ENTER button STANDALONE MODE LOAD Read and print the file SAVE Save the received print data to a file LOAD SAVE 4 F Note Three beeps will sound if you select SAVE and press the 24 ENTER button when there is no received data INTERFACE SELECT Select the memory type using the A V buttons and then press the 4 ENTER button INTERFACE SELECT Nolen SD CARD e When LOAD is selected in previous screen three beeps will sound if the USB MEMORY connected memory has no data to load or the selected memory is not connected e When SAVE is selected in previous screen three beeps will sound if the number of registered items is 99 or the selected memory is not connected 66 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration SET NAME Specify a name for the received print data Available characters are A to Z a to z 0 to 9 and amp _ When space is entered the characters after the space become SEI NAME invalid Up to 16 characters can be entered and the default value is
249. s 0000 0000 LAN IPv6 ROUTER Shows the IPv6 router information for the LAN LAN IPv6 ROUTER 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 175 4 Operation and Configuration LAN MAC ADDRESS Shows the MAC address of the LAN LAN MAC ADDRESS XX XX XX AX XX XX WLAN IP ADDRESS Shows the IP address of the wireless LAN WLAN IP ADDRESS Note e This screen shows only if a wireless LAN unit is installed DHCP should be enabled to acquire the WLAN IP address 192 168 1 1 The IP address is shown as before it is acquired e The dynamic IP address will be shown after it is acquired When the printer fails to acquire the IP address or DHCP is disabled the static IP address will be shown WLAN MAC ADDRESS Shows the MAC address of the wireless LAN WLAN MAC ADDRESS Note XX XX XX XX XX This screen shows only if a wireless LAN unit is installed XX BD ADDRESS Shows the BD address BD ADDRESS XX XX XX AX XX XX 176 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration INTERFACE AUTO SELECT Shows the interface auto detection status INTERFACE AUTO SELECT e shows when the interface is not detected e DISABLE shows that the INTERFACE AUTO SELECT function is disabled manual setting IEEE1284 RS 232C LAN USB WLAN or Bluetooth shows the detected interface S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 177 4 Opera
250. s 263 6 6 Adjusting the Head Pressure Balance 265 6 7 Adjusting the Head Position eee eeee eere eee 267 6 7 1 Left Right Pressure Balance Setting ccccceccccceceeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeaes 267 6 7 2 Front Rear Head AIODITeDL eausa x cuta r onu Ecco petet ssat tact pouces e euin a E LEM deco Rae 268 6 8 Adjusting the Ribbon Tension Balance 269 6 9 Adjusting the Media Feed Roller Balance 270 k TROUDICSINOOUING secs c 271 7 1 When an Error Message Occurs 11 eee e ieeee reinen nnne nnn nana nnn nana 271 7 1 1 More Information about Command Error sees 279 7 1 2 More Information about Head Check FUN ction ccccceceesseceseeeseceeeeaeeeeeteenees 280 7 2 When a Warning Message Occurs 1 cesse eeeee eene nennen nnn nna 281 7 3 When the LED Lights Red Blue eese 203 7 4 Troubleshooting Table sirsiran ere Rer o eese aiaiai 284 7 4 1 No Power Nothing on the Screen ccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaeaeeeeseueeeeessagess 284 74 2 Cannot Feed the Medla er E PE RE EE a ea Ea RUBUS UU FU e 284 7 4 3 Can Feed the Media but
251. sable the head check function HEAD CHECK ENABLE IMINTASNS 4 F HEAD CHECK Automatically check if there is a filament disconnection of the print head NORMAL Check the entire print area BARCODE Check only the area for printing a barcode Head check is not applicable for barcodes printed as graphic data CAUTION Head check is a reference for checking for a filament disconnection of the print head This function does not guarantee barcode readability Note Shows only if the head check function is enabled 148 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual HEAD CHECK NORMAL BARCODE HEAD CHECK MODE Set the method for the head check ALL Perform the head check for every item CHECK PAGE Perform the head check for each specified number of media e START END The head check occurs before starting to print and when printing is stopped If backfeed is applicable the head check occurs before starting to print when stopping to print and during the backfeed Note Shows only if the head check function is enabled HEAD CHECK PAGE NO opecify the number of media between each head check The setting range is from 000001 to 999999 Note Shows only if HEAD CHECK MODE is set to CHECK PAGE EXTERNAL SIGNAL SETTING Select whether or not to perform the external signal setting e YES Proceed to the external signal setting screen NO Proceed to the ZERO SLASH screen EXTERNAL SIGNAL Enable or disable the external
252. sconnect the power cord from the outlet to maintain safety Before You Start Precautions for Installation and Handling Printer operation can be affected by the printer environment Refer to the following instructions for installation and handling of the S84 ex S86 ex printer Select a Safe Location Place the printer on a surface that is flat and level If the surface is not flat and level this may cause bad print quality This may also cause a malfunction and decrease the life span of the printer Do not place the printer on a location that produces vibration Giving serious vibration or shock to the printer may cause a malfunction and shorten the life span of the printer Keep the printer out of high temperature and humidity Avoid locations subject to extreme or fast changes in temperature or humidity Power Supply This printer requires an AC power supply Be sure to connect the printer to an AC power supply Connect the power cord to a grounded power outlet Make sure that the printer is connected to a grounded power outlet Do not place the printer in a location subject to water or oil Do not place the printer in a location where it will be exposed to water or oil Water or oil entering inside the printer may cause a fire electric shock or malfunction Avoid dust Dust build up may result in bad print quality Keep out of direct sunlight This printer has a built in optical sensor Ex
253. selected the printer will proceed to the IGNORE CR LF screen STATUS4 When selected the printer will proceed to the STATUS REPLY TIMING screen e STATUS5 When selected the printer will proceed to the ITEM NO CHECK screen ITEM NO CHECK Set the item number check function e ENABLE Enable the item number check function e DISABLE Disable the item number check function Note Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUS5 BCC CHECK Set the BCC check function ENABLE Enable the BCC check function e DISABLE Disable the BCC check function Note Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUS5 STATUS REPLY TIMING Set the timing for replying with the status information to the host ENQ Returns a status after receiving a Status Request ENQ which has been sent from the host CYCLE Returns a status from the printer to the host at an interval of 900 ms Note Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUSA 4 Operation and Configuration PROTOCOL STATUSS STATUS4 SUES TEM NO CHECK ENABLE RRS is d F BCC CHECK ENABLE MENS 4 F 9584 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 99 4 Operation and Configuration RS 232C Setting 2400 4800 9600 PUN 38400 5 600 115200 X button PARITY BIT NONE X button i CHARACTER BIT IBIT lt button Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressin
254. ss the 2 ENTER button repeatedly until the HEAD SELECT screen is shown Select the options according to the first fourteen to fifteen characters of the print head serial number and then press the 2 ENTER button e Adjust the print darkness Make sure that the print head opens and closes without difficulties 8 7 2 Replacing the Platen Roller You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn platen roller 1 Make sure that the printer is in power off mode then disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet 2 Open the top cover CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 320 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 3 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head CAUTION The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury 4 Loosen the screw until the bearing clamp is released Do not remove the screw Hemove the bearing from the chassis and the shaft of the platen roller Pull out the platen roller from the printer and replace it with a new platen roller Insert the gear end of the platen roller fully into the printer s center frame Place the bearing back to the chassis and the shaft of the platen roller Rotate the bearing clamp onto the bearing and attach it with the screw After repla
255. ss the 4 ENTER button to confirm CANCEL PRINT JOB COMPLETED shows and three beeps will sound The printer will then enter offline mode The selected print jobs will be cleared from memory 60 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual OFFLINE QTY 000005 n CANCEL PRINT JOB YES 4 n CANCEL PRINT JOB CURRENT WIN n CANCEL PRINT JOB COMPLETED f OFFLINE QTY 000000 4 Operation and Configuration 4 2 5 Adjustment Mode The printer has a quick access to the adjustment mode for setting the print position stop position and print darkness These adjustments are in conjunction with the configuration adjustments performed in the user mode menu m OFFLINE QTY 000000 Press the A or button to set the value OFFSET POSITION mm PITCH POSITION FO mm Press the Dor X button 1 When the printer is in online or offline mode press the A and V buttons for one second to enter the adjustment mode PITCH POSITION shows on the screen 2 Press the A buttons to set the desired value and press the ENTER button to save the setting and proceed to the next adjustment screen PITCH POSITION Offset the print position in the vertical direction oet the offset value with to move the print position opposite the feed direction and value with to move the print position in the feed direction PITCH POSITION The setting value is adjustable by 0 25 mm 0 01 regardless of the print
256. t deleting font data it goes to the FONT DELETE COMPLETED 5L screen Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE RECEIVING The printer is receiving downloaded data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data reception progress FA After receiving downloaded data it goes to the WRITING screen j j RECEIVING CL Note E Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE WRITING The printer is writing downloaded data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data writing progress After writing downloaded data it goes to the FONT REGISTRY COMPLETED screen Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE VERIFYING The printer is verifying the firmware data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data verification progress FH After verifying the firmware data it goes to the PROGRAM DOWNLOAD COMPLETED screen oe i E Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE 186 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration PROGRAM DOWNLOAD COMPLETED This screen shows the completion of the download Three beeps will sound when the program download is completed If downloading through INTERFACE it will return to the DOWNLOAD FH iind PROGRAM DOWNLOAD If downloading through SD CARD or USB MEMORY press the ENTER COMPLETED button to return to the INTERFACE SELECT screen FONT REG
257. t the IPv4 address for NTP server The setting range is from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 NTP IPv4 ADDRESS Note Shows only if the SNTP function is enabled 00 000 000 000 Ak S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 83 4 Operation and Configuration NTP IPv6 ADDRESS Set the IPv6 address for NTP server The setting range is from 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 to NTP IPv6 ADDRESS FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Note shows only if the SNTP function is enabled 0000 0000 TIME ZONE Set the time zone The setting range is from 12 45 to 14 45 TIME ZONE Note 00 Shows only if the SNTP function is enabled ERROR NOTICE Set whether or not to notify the SNTP function error ENABLE Shows an error notice when failing to correct the time ERROR NOTICE DISABLE Does not show an error notice when failing to correct the time ENABLE MIELE 4 F Note Shows only if the SNTP function is enabled SNMP FUNCTION Set the SNMP function ENABLE Enables the SNMP function and goes to SNMP setting SNMP FUNCTION select screen DISABLE Disables the SNMP function and goes to Interface select ENABLE MM BE screen a Note Shows only if the LAN interface is selected 84 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration SNMP SET SELECT Select SNMP settings SNMP SETTING Sets the SNMP settings When select it goes to
258. t vi E i Ax the item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Refer to Section 4 2 15 RFID User Mode for details on the configuration items 338 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual F Open the top cover N CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 8 Turn the head lock lever clockwise to unlock the print head N CAUTION e The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing Be careful not to touch it to avoid being burned e Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury 9 Load the media and ribbon Refer to Section 3 2 Loading the Ribbon and Section 3 5 Loading Media for details 10 Confirm the operation by printing encoding a media Make sure that you read the data and check that it is correctly encoded 8 Appendix 9 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 339 8 Appendix 8 11 1 Printing RFID Tag Errors If the recorded data on a tag is incomplete due to writing on a defective tag the printer will print an RFID tag error to the defective media This function is to prevent the distribution of defective media with a tag error When an RFID tag error occurs the printer prints a slash and the error message such as WRITE TAG ERROR or TAG NOT FOUND When the error is related to the writing error the printer continue to print the first sixteen bytes of write data With the label s
259. ten roller is dirty clean it using the cleaning kit For printer cleaning refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller Is the print head dirty or is there a label attached If the print head is dirty clean it using the to it cleaning pen If a label is attached to the print head remove it If the glue of label is attached to the print head clean it using a cleaning kit Do not clean using a hard object Doing so could cause damage to the print head For printer cleaning refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller Is the print head defective Replace the print head and reset the counter 286 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting No Whattocheck Countermeasure n ete saen cope Is the platen roller damaged Replace the platen roller Is the main CONT PCB defective Replace the main CONT PCB Contact a SATO reseller or technical service center for replacement 7 4 5 Incorrect Print Position a a ae Are the media and ribbon designed for use with Use media and ribbon designed for the printer the printer 2 Are the media and ribbon loaded correctly Check if the media and ribbon are loaded correctly Is the media or ribbon deformed Use the media or ribbon that is not deformed You cannot feed the media or ribbon that is deformed 4 the pint headinstalod coney Mstepiihead S iste media ouide stconecty Autthemedaguge 6 isthe co
260. ter Check the setting of the LAN Ethernet interface through the INTERFACE MODE menu Check that the allocated IP address is accessible by PING Check that the power of the HUB is on 6 Check that the HUB is not defective Power on the printer again 7 5 3 Bluetooth Interface Optional mE Check that the Bluetooth function is on Check that the devices using the same frequency band such as wireless LAN enabled devices or Lane Sone ne reper a aa are not in use 8 Check that there is no obstacle such as a metal rack between the Check that there is no obstacle such as a metal rack between the printer and the host and the host Check the configuration of the printer 3 Ir the suu EMEN A of the Bluetooth interface through the INTERFACE MODE menu 5 Power on the Powerontheprinterandcomputeragain 000 and computer again Install the Bluetooth driver again 288 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting 7 5 4 RS 232C Interface E Check that the RS 232C cable is connected correctly 2 Check that the cable is not Checkthatthecableisnotdamaged 00000000 4 it there are If there are multiple RS 232C ports on the computer connect to another port RS 232C ports on the computer connect to another port Power on the printer and computer again 7 5 5 IEEE1284 Interface Check that the printer cable is connected to the LPT port of the computer correctly Check
261. ter operations You can view Information External signal Status and Sensor level pages without logging in However login is required to view Printer Configuration pages such as Adjustment mode and etc 4 3 1 Information Information is the default page of web configuration The Information page is shown as follows Refer to Section 4 2 16 Information Mode Model S86 ex 203dpi Resolution 203dpi 8 dpmm MAC Address XX XXO0CXXOO0CXX WAV AS Ceaseless Creativity for a Sustainable World Information Display Status Information External signal Status Firmware Sensor level Font Version Date 61 XX XX XX 15 07 17 Printer Configuration KB Firmware 55 XX XX XX 14 05 16 Adjustment mode User mode Interface mode Interface mode SNMP WLAN Setting WLAN Certificate Memory mode Service mode Advanced mode RFID mode Emulation mode System Others Restart Printer Emu Loader Emu SZPL Emu SDPL Emu SIPL Printer Status Serial number LAN IPv4 Address LAN IPv6 Address WLAN IP Address WLAN MAC Address BD Address b 1 XX XX XX 15 07 07 61 XX XX XX 15 07 16 61 XX XX XX 15 07 15 61 XX XX XX 15 07 15 Online 00000000 10 65 2 65 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 64 192 168 1 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 90 EF 8C 52 INTERFACE AUTO SELECT LAN 198 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Life counter Head1 counter Head counter Head3 counter 4 Operation and Configuration 4 3 2 External Signal Status
262. terface Basic Specifications When IPv4 is selected Connector RJ 45 Receptacle Power Supply Powered from the printer Protocol Status3 Status4 Cyclic response mode Status4 ENQ response mode Status5 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Initial 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Initial 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Initial 0 0 0 0 Basic Specifications When IPv6 is selected Connector RJ 45 Receptacle Power Supply Powered from the printer Protocol Status3 Status4 Cyclic response mode Status4 ENQ response mode Status5 IP Address 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF Initial 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Prefix 0 128 Initial 64 Default Router 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF Initial 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 358 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Link Status LED LED1 Green LED lights up for 10 ms when packets are received LED lights up when the printer established the LINK with Ethernet device LED lights off when the printer detected the LED2 Orange LED lights up when the printer detected the connection to 100BASE TX LED lights up when a cable is not connected Cable Specifications Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Category 5 Cable Length 100 m 828 feet or less Software Specifications Supported Protocol TCP IP Ne
263. the ENTER button at each screen CLEAN HEAD amp When the warning is released by pressing the 4 ENTER button the warning screen is deleted PLATEN ROLLER and the printer goes to the next screen Press the A V buttons Ay CHANGE PRINT HEAD Press the A V buttons is CHANGE PLATEN ROLLER 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 317 8 Appendix 8 7 Replacing Consumable Parts Some consumable parts such as the print head and platen roller will wear out over time and can be replaced easily This section describes the procedures to replace these parts Note Use only SATO genuine consumable parts for replacement Contact your SATO reseller or technical support center for parts ordering information Regular cleaning may extend the life span of some print heads and platen rollers Refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller for details 8 7 1 Replacing the Print Head You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn print head Before replacement Perform a factory test print and check the head counter N WARNING e Do not touch the power switch connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands are wet Doing so could cause an electric shock Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you replace the print head Wear gloves before replacing the print head to prevent damage to the print head 1 Make sure that the printer is in power off mode then disconne
264. tion and Configuration 4 2 17 Test Print Mode The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the test print mode The table describes each setting screen in detail Press button Power On Press the 4 gt Aor V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the TEST WLAN shows only when a wireless LAN unit is installed TEST PRINT MODE CONFIGURATION E z x button t 4 button M x ee When the above TEST When the above TEST When the above TEST When the PRINT MODE is set as PRINT MODE is set as PRINT MODE is set as above CONFIGURATION FACTORY or WLAN CONFIGURE LIST IEST BARCODE or HEAD CHECK PRINT MODE is TEST PRINT SIZE TEST PRINT SIZE LABEL LENGTH set as FONT or acm acm MEMORY E T PRINT MODE menu i Ree an eee ee 4 button 4 button 4 button or f DARKNESS X button mm min een niue SSS Ss ENTER gt PRINT ENTER gt PRINT Ax or gt button m m mmm m mum m m mm m m mum m m um m m um m m mmm 4 button F TEST PRINT PRESS ENTER KEY Note e When EXTERNAL SIGNAL in the ADVANCED MODE menu is set to ENABLE the printer is unable to perform the test print correctly Make sure that the EXTERNAL SIGNAL is set to
265. to 8 digits When the barcode type of barcode setting The input digit is fixed to 13 The input digit is according to lt B gt D BD is specified to EAN13 digits the command specification UPC A the print data input digit is fixed to 13 digits Only when 8 dots mm When an odd number digit is specified in the The data is printed O is The data is not printed START CODE C with CODE128 barcode added command error setting BG 0 is added to the trailing edge of the data and printed The default value of the print area vertical 2500 mm 8 3 2 Compatible Mode Print Head Width only for S86 ex printer The following table shows the operation of the compatible mode print head width S86 ex 203 dpi S86 ex 305 dpi BH hsblewidi width 167 5mm 152 0mm 128 0mm 167 5 mm 152 0 mm 6 59 5 98 5 04 6 59 5 98 The maximum print position offset setting 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 dot Label size adjustment width 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e Maximum value dot The maximum print horizontal position 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 setting H dot Ruled line frame border print setting FW 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e The maximum length of the border line dot White and black inverse printing setting lt gt 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e The maximum value for the horizontal inverse area dot Copy within label WD 1340 1216 1024 2010 1824 e The maximum value for the horizontal
266. to TYPE4 for PREND output signal of pin No 5 Refer to the EXTERNAL SIGNAL screen of the Advanced Mode menu for details You can set the pin number for input and output through the INPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SIGNAL screen of the Advanced Mode menu When using the 14 pin conversion cable do not connect the power pin to IN COM pin The IN COM pin is connected to 5 V in cable These input signal terminals can be connected to the open collector input devices This is online output signal when MODE is selected in the EXT 9PIN SELECT screen of the service mode The signal outputs the status of the remaining print existing when MODE1 is selected 366 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Input Output circuit diagram of 25 pins external signal interface DB 25 pins female terminal When the output from the user is NPN transistor output Power is supplied from the user User Printer 5V 24V O Transistor NPN Photo coupler Photo Mos FET Power is supplied from the printer User Printer C IN COM Transistor NPN O Photo coupler EXT O Photo Mos FET E Q C OUT COM Q S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 367 8 Appendix When the output from the user is PNP transistor output User Printer Transistor PNP 24V Input Output circuit diagram of 14 pin external signal interface Amphenol 14 pins female connector User Printer 5V GND Q Q IP
267. to the applicator Install the media supply dispensers with an operational distance to the printer s input side Do not install this printer in a location as follows Doing so could cause the printer to malfunction e A location that is subject to vibration e A location with high temperature and humidity A dusty location e A location exposed to direct sunlight e A location with a lot of electrical noise A location with a large fluctuation in power 9584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 21 2 Installing the Printer 22 Installation Space Make sure that there is sufficient space around the printer so that the top cover can be fully opened when operating or cleaning the printer or replacing consumables And make sure that there is sufficient space on the rear side of the printer so that the rear housing cover can be fully opened during maintenance The illustrations in this section show the printer from different angles providing dimensions and spatial requirements 2 2 1 Front View S84 ex S86 ex printer 245 mm 9 6 5 mm 0 2 o L6 5 positions 5 mm 0 2 265 mm 10 4 30 mm 1 2 Americas Standard Right Hand Europe Asia Left Hand 150 mm 5 9 22 S 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 2 Installing the Printer 2 2 2 Rear View S84 ex S86 ex printer O indicates five positions of bores for installing the pr
268. ton The adjustment range of ADJUST LEVEL is from 0 ADJUST LEVEL to 3 we We recommend using the initial value which is 2 The light reception level adjustment of the Gap sensor is shown First adjust the Low reception level voltage of the Gap sensor 3 Open the top cover and unlock the media feed and media sensor assembly 4 Physically place the liner without the label resting over the Gap sensor 5 Press the media feed and media sensor assembly down to lock it To get the correct adjustment result close the media sensor assembly before performing the adjustment 6 Press the A V buttons to change ADJUST Low level 1 0V LEVEL until the GAP R value is 1 0 V or lower SENSOR LEVEL The adjustment range of ADJUST LEVEL is from 0 to 127 GAP R ADJUST LEVEL BET Note The ADJUST LEVEL manipulates the potentiometer which will be therefore reset to 90 the default value when replacing the PCB or initializing the settings S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 261 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments T Take a note of the GAP R value from the above procedure This is the Low level value for the Gap sensor Next check the High level voltage of the Gap sensor 8 Unlock the media feed and media sensor assembly v Gap sensors 37 area 9 Physically place the label resting over the Gap sensor 10 Press the media feed and media sensor assembly down to lock it
269. tons and then press HOW MANY CHR the ENTER button The setting range is from 01 to 16 1 8 ENTER SHIFT NAME Specify a name for the work shift Available characters are A to Z space and 0 to 9 The number of characters you can enter depends on the character size set ENTER SHIFT NAME in the HOW MANY CHR screen Press the lt P buttons to shift the cursor and press the A V buttons to i set the character Press the lt ENTER button to save the work shift name 64 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 2 7 Simple Standalone Mode 4 Operation and Configuration This mode allows the printer to function independently from a host computer once a fixed format has been sent and saved to the SD card or USB memory The data may be saved to the SD card or USB memory while in the print buffer then recalled later with a new print quantity specified The SD card or USB memory can hold a maximum of ninety nine formats However one file number will only hold a single format new format will overwrite the existing saved format The host computer must be reconnected to the printer to overwrite an existing format The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for the simple standalone mode The table describes each setting screen in detail OFFLINE QTY 000000 oorx button STANDALONE MODE 1 EUM SAVE 4 F Select SAVE 4 button X button I I I INTERFACE SELECT SD CARD USB MEMORY
270. tor Manual 285 7 Troubleshooting No Wnatochek _ Countermeasure If the media sensor is dirty clean it using the cleaning kit Is the media sensor dirty For printer cleaning refer to Section 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller Does the interface operate correctly Check the interface according to the Interface Troubleshooting Is the data or signal sent from the computer Power on the device again incorrect Check the data sent from the computer and communication conditions oO Is the print head defective Replace the print head and reset the counter 10 Is the main CONT PCB defective Replace the main CONT PCB Contact a SATO reseller or technical service center for replacement 7 4 4 Bad Print Quality a ae Countermeasure Are the media and ribbon designed for use with Use media and ribbon designed for the printer the printer iB Are the media and ribbon loaded correctly Check if the media and ribbon are loaded correctly Is the tension of the ribbon correct Adjust the tension of the ribbon Is the print head installed correctly Install the print head correctly 5 Is the pressure of the print head too strong or too Adjust the pressure of the print head with the weak head pressure adjustment dial 6 Is the print speed too fast Adjust the print speed Is the print darkness too low or too high Adjust the print darkness Is the platen roller dirty If the pla
271. torage allocated to a card slot cannot be allocated to another card slot Refer to the Programming reference for details on the command MEMORY MODE Perform the memory settings The following options are available MEMORY SIZE Check the free size of the selected memory MEMORY MODE STORED CONTENTS Shows the information that is registered in the selected memory STORED CONTENTS SETTING SAVE Save the printer setting information to the selected z memory SETTING UPLOAD Update the printer setting information stored in the SETTING UPLOAD selected memory FORMAT Initialize and format the selected memory BACK Returns to the MEMORY CARD MODE screen PLEASE SELECT MEMORY oelect the memory you want to perform the settings The following options are available e SD CARD PLEASE SELECT e USB MEMORY MEMORY ROM SD CARD USB MEMORY Note Shows only if MEMORY MODE is set to MEMORY SIZE STORED CONTENTS or FORMAT 114 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual MEMORY SIZE Check the free size of the selected memory The memory unit BYTE KB MB GB changes automatically according to the free space of the memory Note After you press the 4 ENTER button the screen returns to MEMORY CARD MODE STORED CONTENTS Select the type of information registered in the memory The following options are available e FORM OVERLAY e FORMAT e GRAPHIC BMP FILE MEMORY INFORMATION Shows the number of files and tota
272. try to adjust To clear the error missing elements to white Power off or change bars the head check Refer to Section 7 1 2 Ay TT conditions More Information about PLEASE CONTACT Head Check Function SUPPORT CENTER for details The print head is Replace the print head damaged Refer to Section 8 7 1 Replacing the Print Head for details Memory write error Flashes red The USB memory is Connect the USB s disconnected while memory One long beep writing The copy area in the Make sure that the memory is not sufficient memory has sufficient copy area Writing to the memory Replace the memory fails The USB memory is not Format the USB memory formatted in the memory mode Refer to Section 4 2 11 Memory Mode for details To clear the error Power off the printer Flashes red The SD card is not Connect the SD card connected One long beep The SD card is not Connect the SD card Toce eee connected correctly correctly Power off the printer The SD card is Connect the SD card disconnected while writing The SD card read write Replace the SD card fails The SD card is not Format the SD card in the formatted memory mode Refer to Section 4 2 11 Memory Mode for details The SD card is write Release the write protect protected of the SD card 2 4 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 7 Troubleshooting Error No Message LED Buzzer Cause Countermeasure Memory full error Flashes r
273. tting screen Select SETTING X button i 1 button AUTO ONLINE FEED 4 button Oe m Pm pee om omm i X button Shows when ENABLE is selected in EXTERNAL REPRINT YES is selected in REPRINT W FEED REPRINT is selected in FUNCTION KEY or ENABLE is selected in CONTINUOUS PRINT k um mom omm mo eo mo om X button i FORWARD BACKFEED DISTANCE seems 000mm isk S button 1 4 button Shows only if you have installed the optional RFID kit and PREND TYPE 3 4 enabled RFID mode MUN MOTION 4 F button mI BACKFEED SPEED FAST NORMAL 124 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or Y button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the 2 button on each screen will revert to the SERVICE MODE setting screen ENGL I SH FRENCH lt button X button PRIORITY SETTING COMMAND INTERNAL 4 button X button RIBBON NEAR END mms DISABLE 4 F 1 4 button LABEL RE DETECT miis DISABLE Select ON 4 button PASSWORD NO X button Shows for the thermal transfer model only Select OFF 4 button i 4 button COMPATIBLE MODE ON OFF d F i A button EX butoni yw COMPATIBLE MODE Shows for the S86 ex series models only HEAD SIZE NORMAL 203dpi NORMAL M8460Se M8485Se i 4 button l 18460Se 305dpi NORMAL M8465Se
274. tton Power on the printer again UPDATED SETTING PLEASE POWER OFF l 1 0 SIGNALS INITIALIZE w YES 44 X button X button ZERO SLASH YES NO l Power on the printer again 4 button INITIALIZED SETTING PLEASE POWER OFF A D l l l l J 144 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the ADVANCED MODE menu X button PRINT OFFSET v f0000 H 0000 Axk lt button X button H Shows only when the head density is 12 dots mm and compatibility mode is selected Shows only when the calendar IC is installed CALENDAR 01 01 gt CALENDAR INPUT 01 01 00 00 ask 4 button X button CALENDAR CALENDAR DAY OF WEEK CODE MONTH CODE i i i i SUNDAY Me JANUARY uon i l 441 X button A X button CALENDAR CASE FORMAT MIXED UPPER 4 F 4 button CALENDAR CHECK ENABLE DARYA 4 F 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 145 4 Operation and Configuration Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen Pressing the button on each screen will revert to the
275. tu deleted Bede ictu de ta E 184 4 2 20 Upload ModE de 189 4 2 21 Hidden Setting MOGO Lii aec i 191 4 2 22 Wireless LAN Certificate Download MOde ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeenaaes 192 4 2 29 ote Survey MOE prenian di teta etoetut uote atii dcn Utt eeu etn 194 2 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual Table of Contents 4 3 Web Configuration sie cocteci asec arccosseerocseveteicsrectetenedcecsateeecestseastasevecetduecsustoesaneves 198 aeo e aure darc SN RE MP RH 198 4 9 2 External Signal OldtUS suam decedunt o emet durer eau a iuter Da obest picea laret 199 Ao C eI zie CMON T T MUT 200 aoa yaris M asunnet 201 ZANE oSer Mod eet MEE EC UE PETENTE 202 49 5 internace Modo scu actos oet ans eeiniso ohio o oe E xm Doe Oed 203 4 3 7 Interrace Mode SINIVIPO costosa vea Sr utis tra esc eiu unte s tute epu uuu alia 204 4 3 9 WLAN CHING octauo eot Pads de Sor revu ett bud E creto iu Det ms BRE Sene 206 AO NEAN C oricare E 208 A510 MEMON MOJE nesis a A 209 d 3 11496rvIoe MOGOUG rae A n Rare E dta TIROU eO US ES 210 4 3 12 Advanced Mode eiie a euo eiae Seem E Da Lun ue hte Moose Seu PONE 212 S RRENO gt FEN UR ERE E NOTE TRE 215 4 3 VA ErulaUorm MOGO ccei Mes iatee tate e E P Mt MI isti 216 ANSA Edw CA IRR ONG MEN OR m 218 4 3 16 HOS LANE te TIO Sani aee onois stt acccpit an decent tup Det due sutelqu area tee
276. twork Layer ARP IP ICMP Session Layer TCP UDP Application Layer LPD FTP TELNET BOOTP DHCP HTTP SNMP SNTP S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 359 8 Appendix 8 13 3 RS 232C Interface This interface complies with the RS 232C standard Basic Specifications Asynchronous ASCII Half duplex communication Bi directional communication Data Transmission Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 default 38400 57600 115200 bps Transmission Form Start b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 Stop b8 will be omitted if using 7 bit oriented Protocol Ready Busy XON XOFF Status3 Status4 Status5 default When compatible mode is ON Status2 e e e e Connector Pin Specifications DaaCamerDetect 00000000000000000 Output Transmit Data Output Data Terminal Ready ENENENMLT HON 360 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Cable Specifications Cable Connector DB 9 Male or equivalent Cable Length 5 m 16 4 feet or less Note e When using the READY BUSY control make sure that the printer is in power on mode before you send the data from the host e With communication protocols such as XON XOFF STATUS3 STATUSA or STATUSS a receive buffer full error will occur when the received data is more than the receive buffer size 2 95 MB Send data that is less than 2 95 MB while monitoring the status of the printer A parity error will be detected if this error occurs after the reception of ESC A S84 ex S86 e
277. uble the value for Print Darkness lt E gt and set it as the print darkness Print darkness value lt E gt The value converted as az 1 Darkness value T E Note e Shows only if COMPATIBLE MODE DARKNESS is set to ENABLE e This table explains that the system accepts the legacy Print Darkness setting command and does not guarantee that the printed darkness of the succeeding model will be the same as the older model 134 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration MEDIA LENGTH Set the maximum length of the media to be used This function affects the printable area lengthwise and media size checking function It is necessary to set this value based on the actual MEDIA LENGTH media length to be used The setting range varies depending on the model as follows E500 mm 43 Model Name Setting Range Default mm Value mm S84 ex 203 dpi 0 2500 2500 S84 ex 305 dpi 0 1500 1500 S84 ex 609 dpi 0 400 586 ex 203 dpi 0 1249 1249 S86 ex 305 dpi 0 1249 1249 TRACE MODE Enable or disable the function to show the printer operation status through icons in online mode The following operation status are available E TRACE MODE ACU Data reception Shows after receiving any data ENABLE MIB J Data edition Shows after receiving ESC 1BH A 4k Print Shows after a print job Each icon will be overwritten and cleared when changing to online mode SAVE PRINT LOG
278. ue for control codes if CUSTOM is selected USER CODE SOH Set the SOH code The setting range is from 00 to FF hexadecimal USER CODE Three beeps will sound indicating error if the value is identical with other codes STX CR CNTBY SOH Note Shows only if CTRL CODE TYPE is set to CUSTOM USER CODE STX Set the STX code The setting range is from 00 to FF hexadecimal USER CODE Three beeps will sound indicating error if the value is identical with other codes SOH CR CNTBY STX Note Shows only if CTRL CODE TYPE is set to CUSTOM USER CODE CR Set the CR code The setting range is from 00 to FF hexadecimal USER CODE Three beeps will sound indicating error if the value is identical with other codes SOH STX CNTBY CR oD Note Shows only if CTRL CODE TYPE is set to CUSTOM 236 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode USER CODE CNTBY Set the CNTBY code The setting range is from 00 to FF hexadecimal USER CODE Three beeps will sound indicating error if the value is identical with other codes SOH STX CR CNTBY Note Shows only if CTRL CODE TYPE is set to CUSTOM LABEL ROTATION oet the page orientation of label printing ENABLE Labels are printed in inverse portrait orientation The image LABEL ROTATION will be printed as 180 degree rotation DISABLE Labels are printed in normal portrait orientation ENABLE EESTI 4 k FORMAT ATTRIBUTE Set the format attribut
279. uffer type MULTI Multiple receive buffers RECEIVE BUFFER 1ITEM A single receive buffer MULTI Note 1ITEM Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to READY BUSY or XON XOFF S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 103 4 Operation and Configuration IEEE1284 Setting Press the 4 gt A or V button to select an item or set the value accordingly The active arrow icons are shown on the screen I i Pressing the button on each i screen will revert to the INTERFACE MODE menu X button PROTOCOL STATUS4 NEMUS Shows only when STATUS5 is selected BCC CHECK ENABLE PARJA s 4 k Shows only when STATUS4 is selected Shows only when 1 RECEIVE 1 BUFFER is set to 1ITEM I EEE1284 ACK SIGNAL DES us 104 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration PROTOCOL Set the communication protocol STATUS4 When selected the printer will proceed to the RECEIVE PROTOCOL BUFFER screen STATUSA e STATUS5 When selected the printer will proceed to the ITEM NO CHECK screen STATUS5 ITEM NO CHECK Set the item number check function ENABLE Enable the item number check function ITEM NO CHECK ENABLE DRYAS 4 F e DISABLE Disable the item number check function Note Shows only if PROTOCOL is set to STATUS5 BCC CHECK Set the BCC check function ENABLE Enable the BCC check function BCC CHECK e DISABLE Disable the BCC check function ENABLE MIBL
280. ulation module in the printer memory the printer shows the MODULE DELETE menu MODULE DELETE If all the emulation module has been deleted the printer shows the COMPLETED MODULE SETTING menu S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 225 5 Emulation Mode 9 1 3 Downloading the Emulation Module In the emulation module loader user can download the emulation module A total of four emulation modules can be downloaded to the printer memory The flowchart shows the sequence of the setting screens for loading the emulation module The table describes each setting screen in detail CAUTION Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory or SD card before connecting it to the printer SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for a malfunction of the printer caused by a virus infection through the USB memory or SD card MODULE SETTING Select DOWNLOAD X button 44 button INTERFACE SELECT INTERFACE SD CARD USB MEMORY Select SD CARD or USB MEMORY 4 button Select INTERFACE A button Download DOWNLOAD READY comnleteds iis RECEIVING READING XX XX MODULE DOWNLOAD 3 short beeps COMPLETED when the MODULE DOWNLOAD download is COMPLETED 3 short beeps when the completed download is completed button 226 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 5 Emulation Mode Note Firmware download may fail if there is insufficient download area for the emulation modules Delete the unnecessar
281. useeseuseessageeessags 51 e edzigtogBi ei scele c 52 A LA SERN DISHA ser 53 4 2 Operating MOQOGS uiua iaaa a aa iaaa paias 55 4 2 1 Online Mode Pause Mode Offline Mode seseeeeeseeeeeeene 58 4 2 2 Adjusting the Display Brightness ccccccssccccseeeccseeeeceeseeeceeeeeseeeesauseessaneeessaes 59 4 2 3 Adjusting the Buzzear VolUME iusti rt e toes e genui ascent eer a etat iu iG 59 4 2 4 Canceling the PrntJOD ssni ee eet tuo Ea aed aaea EDESA suus 60 42 o Adjustment IM OCC iusto E A 61 4 2 6 Work Shift Setting Mode sees eene nnn nna nnns 63 4 2 7 Simple Standalone Mode riere cse cider ec AAR Exe ek E 65 A 2 8 Setting Mode Menu Me T TT 69 722 1h 1 al eee ee en ere ee ee eee ee nee ee ee 71 ree 8 Vall ga ese ModE mee arene eee mere eter eran TEE 76 AZ die MNO WIG CO T TTL PPM 111 42 12 Servi Ce ModE o en ee ee eee 119 4 213 Advanced MOGQGuedtosriciu uten etat xim ta uo dE toi us oet oc i xnF de ant ot S Tug seem boc e iesus PE 142 42 14 Hex DOT VIOGG x agakcensdisdtisdeetuna aceti kt ne enn reer eee eee nee me a ene ai code 161 4 2 15 FIBAUSerMOGO noe imentor eiut aiete eni o EMI ES 166 AP 16 Intormatlor ModE sercar doped Beles ce deu aie bai ue cete Rui loa eal agit 174 S EN WAEE UE MIA IWIOO GS MOT 178 4 2 19 Deru Setn Mode ipud uaa on en ieee E 181 42 19 Download MOGG cete tb pate eie mess eue viet da
282. x Operator Manual 49 4 Operation and Configuration e Memory card status Mon 0 Desorption 0 00 0 Boo memwenmsbeme ned Shows when an SD card is inserted Shows when a USB memory is inserted Note These icons show when the SD card or USB memory is connected These icons do not show when the printer is in an error mode These icons do not show when the trace mode is enabled These icons do not show when the ESC IM command for specifying LCD display is in use These icon colors are inverted when the SD card or USB memory is being accessed DO S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 4 Operation and Configuration 4 1 2 Setting Mode Menu and Icons In the setting mode menu the screen is shown as follows Selected setting mode USER MODE Setting mode icons When an icon is woe selected its color is WE der H LE Je Valid arrow buttons inverted for selection Shows the emulation icon when the selected emulation module is loaded Refer to Section 4 2 8 Setting Mode Menu for more details e Setting Mode lon 1 0 Description O O LM wee o TE m E i The printer enters the advanced mode A The printer enters the hex dump print mode ct The printer enters the RFID user mode Shows only if you have installed the optional RFID kit and enabled the RFID mode The printer enters the loaded emulation mode zz zr zt Shows only if you have loaded with the selected emulation firmware module
283. x Operator Manual 361 8 Appendix 8 13 4 IEEE1284 Interface This interface complies with the IEEE1284 standard Basic Basic Specifications O Connector Amphenol 36 pins female High level 12 4 to 5 0 V Low level 40 0 to 0 4 V Single item buffer Multi item buffer Protocol Status4 Status5 Connector Pin Specifications a a Input DATA 1 DATA 8 DATA1 LSB DATA8 MSB 362 S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 8 Appendix Connector Pin Specifications Description 31 INITIALIZE 32 FAULT 33 35 Not in use 36 SELECT INPUT Cable Specifications Cable Connector Amphenol 36 pins male Cable Length 1 5 m 5 feet or less 84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 363 8 Appendix 8 13 5 External Signal Interface EXT This interface is designed to connect the printer with other peripherals Basic Specifications Connector DB 25 pins female Supplied with 14 pin conversion cable Amphenol 14 pins female Signal Levels High level 14 2 to 5 0 V Low level 0 0 to 0 7 V DB 25 pins female connector printer e e e 9 wo e e e Wiring chart of the 14 pin conversion cable DB 25 pins male 25 pins 14 pins Amphenol 14 pins connector 1 14 female connector 4 4 9 6 6 9 8 7 12 13 24 13 12 14 2 15 16 A 17 1 18 ______________ 10 20 _____ _ __ 5 21
284. y Use a cleaning pen cotton swab or cotton cloth from a cleaning kit to clean Do not clean with a hard object Doing so could cause damage Remove the media and ribbon before cleaning Note You can purchase a cleaning kit or cleaning sheet from a SATO reseller or technical service center 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 241 6 Cleaning and Performing Printer Adjustments 6 2 Maintenance of the Print Head and Platen Roller Maintenance should be performed at the following regular intervals e After you print one media roll or print media for one hundred and fifty meters Use the cleaning kit to clean these parts Print head Platen roller Media sensors Media guide e After you print six media rolls or print media for nine hundred meters Use the cleaning sheet to clean these parts Print head Platen roller Use the cleaning kit to clean these parts Media guide Feed roller Media route Ribbon route Note The above maintenance intervals are only for reference Perform the cleaning when necessary 6 2 1 Maintenance using the Cleaning Kit The maintenance procedure using the cleaning kit is as follows Note For details on the cleaning kit refer to the manual attached to the cleaning kit 1 Make sure that the printer is in power off mode then disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet 2 Open the top cover N CAUTION Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover 242
285. y emulation module from the printer memory to free up memory space for the new emulation module download INTERFACE SELECT Select the download method INTERFACE Download the emulation module from the interface INTERFACE SELECT e SD CARD Download the emulation module from an SD card e USB MEMORY Download the emulation module from a USB memory INTERFACE SD CARD USB MEMORY DOWNLOAD READY The printer is waiting to receive module data using the selected interface which set by DATA PORT in the Interface mode menu Note DOWNLOAD READY Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE RECEIVING The printer is receiving the module data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data reception wy progress FH After receiving the module data it goes to the WRITING screen RECEIVING Naa Mmm Loo 0 Note E Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE WRITING The printer is writing the module data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data writing progress After writing the module data it goes to the VERIFYING screen Note Shows only if INTERFACE SELECT is set to INTERFACE 584 ex 586 ex Operator Manual 22 5 Emulation Mode VERIFYING The printer is verifying the module data The bar on the lower portion of the screen indicates the data verification progress After verifying the module data it goes to the MODULE DOWNLOAD
286. y the setting of the maximum media length 1 Detection distance of sensor error by the vertical print area Vertical print area after editing Head density V2 12950mm J mm 1250 mm 2 V gt 510 mm mm 2 V 510 mm 9i Omm V JZF mm gt V 8 dots mm 203 dpi 2510 mm 1250 mm 12 dots mm 305 dpi 1510 mm 1250 mm 510 mm 24 dots mm 609 dpi 1250 mm 1250 mm 510 mm S84 ex S86 ex Operator Manual 329 8 Appendix 2 Detection distance of sensor error according to the maximum media length MEDIA LENGTH setting The detection distance setting of the sensor error according to the maximum media length is only available when using the gap sensor Distance between the head position and the gap sensor gt Maximum media length gt 24 mm Detection distance of the sensor error Maximum media length 6 mm 8 8 4 Ribbon Error Ribbon end detection The ribbon sensor on the ribbon supply side and the ribbon sensor on the ribbon rewind side detect the ribbon end error The ribbon end error occurs when one of the ribbon sensor detects the ribbon end 1 Detection by the ribbon sensor on the supply side While feeding the media when the ribbon on the ribbon supply side has not rotated for 32 mm 1 26 or more the ribbon sensor will detect the ribbon end error 2 Detection by the ribbon sensor on the rewind side While feeding the media when the ribbon on the ribbon rewind side has not rotated for 80 mm 3 15 or more the

S84ex/S86ex Operator Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents